WO2006083260A2 - Compositions and systems for forming crosslinked biomaterials and associated methods of preparation and use - Google Patents
Compositions and systems for forming crosslinked biomaterials and associated methods of preparation and use Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2006083260A2 WO2006083260A2 PCT/US2005/014906 US2005014906W WO2006083260A2 WO 2006083260 A2 WO2006083260 A2 WO 2006083260A2 US 2005014906 W US2005014906 W US 2005014906W WO 2006083260 A2 WO2006083260 A2 WO 2006083260A2
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- composition
- fibrotic agent
- agent
- groups
- inhibitor
- Prior art date
Links
- 0 C[C@]1[C@]2(C)C(O)=C[C@](*)C(C)(C(*)[C@@]3C)C12[C@](*)[C@](*)(C1)[C@@](C)(*)C3=C(C)[C@]1O* Chemical compound C[C@]1[C@]2(C)C(O)=C[C@](*)C(C)(C(*)[C@@]3C)C12[C@](*)[C@](*)(C1)[C@@](C)(*)C3=C(C)[C@]1O* 0.000 description 2
Classifications
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61L—METHODS OR APPARATUS FOR STERILISING MATERIALS OR OBJECTS IN GENERAL; DISINFECTION, STERILISATION OR DEODORISATION OF AIR; CHEMICAL ASPECTS OF BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES; MATERIALS FOR BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES
- A61L31/00—Materials for other surgical articles, e.g. stents, stent-grafts, shunts, surgical drapes, guide wires, materials for adhesion prevention, occluding devices, surgical gloves, tissue fixation devices
- A61L31/04—Macromolecular materials
- A61L31/041—Mixtures of macromolecular compounds
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K9/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
- A61K9/14—Particulate form, e.g. powders, Processes for size reducing of pure drugs or the resulting products, Pure drug nanoparticles
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F2/00—Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
- A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
- A61K31/335—Heterocyclic compounds having oxygen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. fungichromin
- A61K31/337—Heterocyclic compounds having oxygen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. fungichromin having four-membered rings, e.g. taxol
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
- A61K47/30—Macromolecular organic or inorganic compounds, e.g. inorganic polyphosphates
- A61K47/34—Macromolecular compounds obtained otherwise than by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds, e.g. polyesters, polyamino acids, polysiloxanes, polyphosphazines, copolymers of polyalkylene glycol or poloxamers
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K9/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
- A61K9/10—Dispersions; Emulsions
- A61K9/107—Emulsions ; Emulsion preconcentrates; Micelles
- A61K9/1075—Microemulsions or submicron emulsions; Preconcentrates or solids thereof; Micelles, e.g. made of phospholipids or block copolymers
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K9/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
- A61K9/14—Particulate form, e.g. powders, Processes for size reducing of pure drugs or the resulting products, Pure drug nanoparticles
- A61K9/16—Agglomerates; Granulates; Microbeadlets ; Microspheres; Pellets; Solid products obtained by spray drying, spray freeze drying, spray congealing,(multiple) emulsion solvent evaporation or extraction
- A61K9/1605—Excipients; Inactive ingredients
- A61K9/1629—Organic macromolecular compounds
- A61K9/1641—Organic macromolecular compounds obtained otherwise than by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds, e.g. polyethylene glycol, poloxamers
- A61K9/1647—Polyesters, e.g. poly(lactide-co-glycolide)
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K9/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
- A61K9/48—Preparations in capsules, e.g. of gelatin, of chocolate
- A61K9/50—Microcapsules having a gas, liquid or semi-solid filling; Solid microparticles or pellets surrounded by a distinct coating layer, e.g. coated microspheres, coated drug crystals
- A61K9/51—Nanocapsules; Nanoparticles
- A61K9/5107—Excipients; Inactive ingredients
- A61K9/513—Organic macromolecular compounds; Dendrimers
- A61K9/5146—Organic macromolecular compounds; Dendrimers obtained otherwise than by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds, e.g. polyethylene glycol, polyamines, polyanhydrides
- A61K9/5153—Polyesters, e.g. poly(lactide-co-glycolide)
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61L—METHODS OR APPARATUS FOR STERILISING MATERIALS OR OBJECTS IN GENERAL; DISINFECTION, STERILISATION OR DEODORISATION OF AIR; CHEMICAL ASPECTS OF BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES; MATERIALS FOR BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES
- A61L24/00—Surgical adhesives or cements; Adhesives for colostomy devices
- A61L24/04—Surgical adhesives or cements; Adhesives for colostomy devices containing macromolecular materials
- A61L24/043—Mixtures of macromolecular materials
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61L—METHODS OR APPARATUS FOR STERILISING MATERIALS OR OBJECTS IN GENERAL; DISINFECTION, STERILISATION OR DEODORISATION OF AIR; CHEMICAL ASPECTS OF BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES; MATERIALS FOR BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES
- A61L27/00—Materials for grafts or prostheses or for coating grafts or prostheses
- A61L27/14—Macromolecular materials
- A61L27/16—Macromolecular materials obtained by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61L—METHODS OR APPARATUS FOR STERILISING MATERIALS OR OBJECTS IN GENERAL; DISINFECTION, STERILISATION OR DEODORISATION OF AIR; CHEMICAL ASPECTS OF BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES; MATERIALS FOR BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES
- A61L27/00—Materials for grafts or prostheses or for coating grafts or prostheses
- A61L27/14—Macromolecular materials
- A61L27/26—Mixtures of macromolecular compounds
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61L—METHODS OR APPARATUS FOR STERILISING MATERIALS OR OBJECTS IN GENERAL; DISINFECTION, STERILISATION OR DEODORISATION OF AIR; CHEMICAL ASPECTS OF BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES; MATERIALS FOR BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES
- A61L27/00—Materials for grafts or prostheses or for coating grafts or prostheses
- A61L27/50—Materials characterised by their function or physical properties, e.g. injectable or lubricating compositions, shape-memory materials, surface modified materials
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P17/00—Drugs for dermatological disorders
- A61P17/02—Drugs for dermatological disorders for treating wounds, ulcers, burns, scars, keloids, or the like
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
- A61P19/02—Drugs for skeletal disorders for joint disorders, e.g. arthritis, arthrosis
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P41/00—Drugs used in surgical methods, e.g. surgery adjuvants for preventing adhesion or for vitreum substitution
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
Definitions
- This invention relates generally to compositions and systems for forming crosslinked biomaterials, to the crosslinked biomaterials prepared thereby, and to methods of using such compositions as, for example, bioadhesives for tissue augmentation, for prevention of surgical adhesions, for coating surfaces of synthetic implants, as drug delivery matrices, for ophthalmic applications, for orthopedic applications, as sealants, as hemostats, and in other applications, as discussed herein and/or as appreciated by one of ordinary skill in the art.
- U.S. Patent No. 5,162,430 to Rhee et al. describes the use of collagen-synthetic polymer conjugates prepared by covalently binding collagen to synthetic hydrophilic polymers such as various derivatives of polyethylene glycol.
- synthetic hydrophilic polymers such as various derivatives of polyethylene glycol.
- U.S. Patent No. 5,328,955 to Rhee et al. various activated forms of polyethylene glycol and various linkages are described, which can be used to produce collagen-synthetic polymer conjugates having a range of physical and chemical properties.
- U.S. Patent No. 5,324,775 to Rhee et al. also describes synthetic hydrophilic polyethylene glycol conjugates, but the conjugates involve naturally occurring polymers such as polysaccharides.
- EP 0 732 109 Al to Rhee discloses a crosslinked biomaterial composition that is prepared using a hydrophobic crosslinking agent, or a mixture of hydrophilic and hydrophobic crosslinking agents, where the preferred hydrophobic crosslinking agents include hydrophobic polymers that contain, or can be chemically derivatized to contain, two or more succinimidyl groups.
- U.S. Patent No. 5,580,923 to Yeung et al. discloses surgical adhesive material that comprises a substrate material and an anti-adhesion binding agent.
- the substrate material is preferably collagen and the binding agent preferably comprises at least one tissue-reactive functional group and at least one substrate-reactive functional group.
- U.S. Patent No. 5,614,587 to Rhee et al. describes bioadhesives that comprise collagen that is crosslinked using a multifunctionally activated synthetic hydrophilic polymer.
- U.S. Patent No. 5,874,500 to Rhee et al. describes a crosslinked polymer composition that comprises one component having multiple nucleophilic groups and another component having multiple electrophilic groups. Covalent bonding of the nucleophilic and electrophilic groups forms a three dimensional matrix that has a variety of medical uses including tissue adhesion, surface coatings for synthetic implants, and drug delivery. More recent developments include the addition of a third component having either nucleophilic or electrophilic groups, as is described in U.S. Patent No. 6,458,889 to Trollsas et al.
- the instant invention which is a mixture of two components, each component having a core substituted with reactive groups, where the reactive groups on one component are capable of reacting with the reactive groups on the other component.
- the components are essentially non-reactive in a dry environment, and upon reaction form a three-dimensional matrix.
- One aspect of the invention relates to a homogeneous dry powder composition comprised of: a first component having a core substituted with m nucleophilic groups, where m>2; and a second component having a core substituted with n electrophilic groups, where n>2 and m+n>4; wherein the nucleophilic and electrophilic groups are non-reactive in a dry environment but are rendered reactive upon exposure to an aqueous environment such that the components inter-react in the aqueous environment to form a three-dimensional matrix.
- a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier may also be included.
- the nucleophilic and electrophilic groups undergo a nucleophilic substitution reaction, a nucleophilic addition reaction, or both.
- the nucleophilic groups may be selected from -NH 2 , -NHR 1 , -N(R 1 ) 2 , -SH, -OH, -COOH, -C 6 H 4 -OH, -H, -PH 2 , -PHR 1 , -P(R 1 ) 2 , -NH-NH 2 , -CO-NH-NH 2 , and -C 5 H 4 N, where R 1 is a hydrocarbyl group, and each R 1 may be the same or different.
- the nucleophilic groups are amino groups and the electrophilic groups are amine-reactive groups.
- the amine-reactive groups may contain an electrophilically reactive carbonyl group susceptible to nucleophilic attack by a primary or secondary amine.
- the amine-reactive groups may be selected from carboxylic acid esters, acid chloride groups, anhydrides, ketones, aldehydes, halo, isocyanato, thioisocyanato, epoxides, activated hydroxyl groups, olefins, carboxyl, succinimidyl ester, sulfosuccinimidyl ester, maleimido, epoxy, and ethenesulfonyl.
- the nucleophilic groups are sulfhydryl groups and the electrophilic groups are sulfhydryl-reactive groups.
- the sulfhydryl-reactive groups may be selected so as to form a thioester, imido-thioester, thioether, or disulfide linkage upon reaction with the sulfhydryl groups.
- the sulfhydryl-reactive groups may have the structure -S-S-Ar where Ar is a substituted or unsubstituted nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic moiety or a non-heterocyclic aromatic group substituted with an electron-withdrawing moiety.
- Ar is a substituted or unsubstituted nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic moiety or a non-heterocyclic aromatic group substituted with an electron-withdrawing moiety.
- the sulfhydryl-reactive groups form a thioether linkage, they may be selected from maleimido, substituted maleimido, haloalkyl, epoxy, imino, aziridino, olefins, and ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated aldehydes and ketones.
- the sulfhydryl-reactive groups may be selected from mixed anhydrides; ester derivatives of phosphorus; ester derivatives of p- nitrophenol, p-nitrothiophenol and pentafluorophenol; esters of substituted hydroxylamines, including N-hydroxyphthalimide esters, N-hydroxysuccinimide esters, N-hydroxysulfosuccinimide esters, and N-hydroxyglutarimide esters; esters of 1-hydroxybenzotriazole; 3-hydroxy-3,4-dihydro-benzotriazin- 4-one; 3-hydroxy-3,4-dihydro-quinazoline-4-one; carbonyl imidazole derivatives; acid chlorides; ketenes; and isocyanates.
- the number of nucleophilic groups in the mixture is approximately equal to the number of electrophilic groups in the mixture.
- the ratio of moles of nucleophilic groups to moles of electrophilic groups may be about 2: 1 to 1 :2, with a ratio of 1 : 1 preferred.
- the core is selected from hydrophilic polymers, hydrophobic polymers, amphiphilic polymers, C 2-H hydrocarbyls, and heteroatom-containing C 2 - 14 hydrocarbyls.
- the core may be a synthetic or naturally occurring hydrophilic polymer.
- the hydrophilic polymer may be a linear, branched, dendrimeric, hyperbranched, or star polymer.
- the hydrophilic polymer may be selected from polyalkylene oxides; polyols; poly(oxyalkylene)-substituted diols and polyols; polyoxyethylated sorbitol; polyoxyethylated glucose; poly(acrylic acids) and analogs and copolymers thereof; polymaleic acids; polyacrylamides; poly(olefinic alcohols); poly(N -vinyl lactams); polyoxazolines; polyvinylamines; and copolymers thereof.
- the hydrophilic polymer may also be selected from proteins, carboxylated polysaccharides, aminated polysaccharides, and activated polysaccharides, such as, for example, collagen and glycosaminoglycan
- the hydrophilic polymer is a polyalkylene oxide or polyols
- the hydrophilic polymer may be selected from polyethylene glycol and poly(ethylene oxide)-poly(propylene oxide) copolymers.
- the hydrophilic polymer is a polyols
- the hydrophilic polymer may be selected from glycerol, polyglycerol and propylene glycol.
- the hydrophilic polymer is a poly(oxyalkylene)-substituted polyol
- the hydrophilic polymer may be selected from mono-, di- and tri-polyoxyethylated glycerol, mono- and di-polyoxyethylated propylene glycol, and mono- and di- polyoxyethylated trimethylene glycol.
- the hydrophilic polymer is a poly(acrylic acid), analog or copolymer thereof
- the hydrophilic polymer may be selected from poly(acrylic acid), poly(methacrylic acid), poly(hydroxyethylmethacrylate), poly(hydroxyethylacrylate), poly(methylalkylsulfoxide acrylates), and poly(methylalkylsulfoxide methacrylates).
- the hydrophilic polymer is a polyacrylamide
- the hydrophilic polymer may be selected from polyacrylamide, poly(methacrylamide), poly(dimethylacrylamide), poly(N-isopropylacrylamide), and copolymers thereof.
- the hydrophilic polymer is a poly(olefinic alcohol)
- the hydrophilic polymer may be selected from polyvinyl alcohols) and copolymers thereof.
- the hydrophilic polymer is a poly(N-vinyl lactam)
- the hydrophilic polymer may be selected from poly(vinyl pyrrolidones), poly(vinyl caprolactams), and copolymers thereof.
- the hydrophilic polymer is a polyoxazoline
- the hydrophilic polymer may be selected from poly(methyloxazoline) and poly(ethyloxazoline).
- the core is a hydrophobic polymer selected
- the core may be selected from polylactic acid and polyglycolic acid.
- the core is a C 2 - 14 hydrocarbyl
- the core may be selected from alkanes, diols, polyols, and polyacids.
- the core is a heteroatom-containing C 2 - H hydrocarbyl
- the core may be selected from di- and poly-electrophiles.
- the first component has the structure of formula (I)
- the homogeneous dry powder composition may further comprise a biologically active agent with or without a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
- the pharmaceutically acceptable carrier may be a micelle, a microsphere, or a nanosphere.
- the pharmaceutically acceptable carrier may be a degradable polymer, such as a polyester, and the polyester may be a glycolide/lactide copolymer.
- the degradable polymer may also be comprised of residues of one or more monomers selected from the group consisting of lactide, lactic acid, glycolide, glycol ic acid, e-caprolactone, gamma-caprolactone, hydroxyvaleric acid, hydroxybutyric acid, beta- butyrolactone, gamma-butyrolactone, gamma-valerolactone, ⁇ -decanolactone, ⁇ -decanolactone, trimethylene carbonate, 1 ,4-dioxane-2-one or l,5-dioxepan-2one.).
- the homogeneous dry powder composition may further comprise a biologically active agent.
- the homogeneous dry powder composition further comprises a biologically active agent that is an anti-fibrotic agent.
- the anti-fibrotic agent may be used to inhibit any of the following: cell regeneration, angiogenesis, fibroblast migration, fibroblast proliferation, deposition of extracellular matrix, tissue remodeling, adenosine deaminase, purine ring synthesis, dihydrofolate reduction, ribonucleotide synthesis or function, thymidine monophosphate synthesis or function, DNA synthesis, protein synthesis, and microtubule function.
- the anti-fibrotic agent may also be used to block thymidine monophosphate, to cause DNA damage, and to cause DNA adduct formation.
- Any of the following anti-fibrotic agents may be used in the homogeneous dry powder composition: an angiogenesis inhibitor; a 5-lipoxygenase inhibitor or antagonist; a chemokine receptor antagonist; a cell cycle inhibitor; a taxane; an anti-microtubule agent; paclitaxel; an analogue or derivative of paclitaxel; a vinca alkaloid; camptothecin or an analogue or derivative thereof; a podophyllotoxin, wherein the podophyllotoxin may be an etoposide or an analogue or derivative thereof; an anthracycline, wherein the anthracycline may be doxorubicin or an analogue or derivative thereof or the anthracycline may be mitoxantrone or an analogue or derivative thereof; a platinum compound; a
- the homogeneous dry powder composition further comprises a biologically active agent that is a fibrosing agent.
- a biologically active agent that is a fibrosing agent.
- the anti-fibrotic agent may be used to promote any of the following; regeneration; angiogenesis; fibroblast migration; fibroblast proliferation; deposition of extracellular matrix (ECM); and tissue remodeling.
- the fibrosing agent may also be used as an arterial vessel wall irritant.
- Fibrosing agents that may be used in the homogeneous dry powder composition may be or may be comprised of silk; silkworm silk; spider silk; recombinant silk; raw silk; hydrolyzed silk; acid- treated silk; acylated silk; mineral particles; talc; chitosan; polylysine; fibronectin; bleomycin; or CTGF.
- the fibrosing agent may also be in the form of a particulate, which may be a biodegradable particulate or a non-biodegradable particulate.
- Biodegradable particulates may be comprised of a material selected from the group consisting of polyester, polyanhydride, poly(anhydride ester), poly(ester-amide), poly(ester-urea), polyorthoester, polyphosphoester, polyphosphazine, polycyanoacrylate, collagen, chitosan, hyaluronic acid, chromic cat gut, alginate, starch, cellulose and cellulose ester.
- Non-biodegradable particulates may be comprised of a material selected from the group consisting of polyester, polyurethane, silicone, polyethylene, polypropylene, polystyrene, polyacrylate, polymethacrylate, and silk.
- preferred particulates may be a particulate form of a member selected from the group consisting of silk, talc, starch, glass, silicate, silica, calcium phosphate, calcium sulfate, calcium carbonate, hydroxyapatite, synthetic mineral, polymethylmethacrylate, silver nitrate, ceramic and other inorganic particles.
- the biologically active agent promotes bone growth.
- the fibrosing agent may promote the bone growth.
- Fibrosing agents that may promote bone growth may include a bone morphogenic protein and an osteogenic growth factor, the latter which may be selected from transforming growth factor, platelet-derived growth factor, and fibroblast growth factor.
- the homogeneous dry powder composition with a fibrosing agent further comprises a pharmaceutical agent that induces sclerosis (a sclerosant), wherein the sclerosant may be a surfactant or it may be selected from the group consisting of ethanol, dimethyl sulfoxide, sucrose, sodium chloride, dextrose, glycerin, minocycline, tetracycline, doxycycline, polidocanol, sodium tetradecyl sulfate, sodium morrhuate, and sotradecol.
- a sclerosant may be a surfactant or it may be selected from the group consisting of ethanol, dimethyl sulfoxide, sucrose, sodium chloride, dextrose, glycerin, minocycline, tetracycline, doxycycline, polidocanol, sodium tetradecyl sulfate, sodium morrhuate, and sotradecol.
- the homogeneous dry powder composition with a fibrosing agent further comprises an inflammatory cytokine, which may be selected from the group consisting of TGF ⁇ , PDGF, VEGF, bFGF, TNF ⁇ , NGF, GM-CSF, IGF-a, IL-I, IL- 1- ⁇ , IL-8, IL-6, and growth hormone.
- an inflammatory cytokine which may be selected from the group consisting of TGF ⁇ , PDGF, VEGF, bFGF, TNF ⁇ , NGF, GM-CSF, IGF-a, IL-I, IL- 1- ⁇ , IL-8, IL-6, and growth hormone.
- the homogeneous dry powder composition with a fibrosing agent further comprises an agent that stimulates cell proliferation, which may be selected from the group consisting of dexamethasone, isotretinoin (13-cis retinoic acid), 17- ⁇ - estradiol, estradiol, l- ⁇ -25 dihydroxyvitamin D 3j diethylstibesterol, cyclosporine A, L-NAME, all- trans retinoic acid (ATRA), and analogues and derivatives thereof.
- an agent that stimulates cell proliferation which may be selected from the group consisting of dexamethasone, isotretinoin (13-cis retinoic acid), 17- ⁇ - estradiol, estradiol, l- ⁇ -25 dihydroxyvitamin D 3j diethylstibesterol, cyclosporine A, L-NAME, all- trans retinoic acid (ATRA), and analogues and derivatives thereof.
- the biologically active agent is mixed with the first and second components to form a mixture.
- the biologically active agent is chemically coupled to the first component or to the second component.
- a crosslinkable composition comprised of: (a) a first crosslinkable component having m nucleophilic groups, wherein m>2; and (b) a second crosslinkable component having n electrophilic groups capable of reaction with the m nucleophilic groups to form covalent bonds, wherein n>2 and m+n>5, the first component comprises two or more amino acid residues selected from the group consisting of amino acids comprising primary amine groups and amino acids comprising thiol groups, the second component comprises a polyethylene glycol moiety, and each of the first and second crosslinkable components is biocompatible, synthetic, and nonimmunogenic, and further wherein crosslinking of the composition results in a biocompatible, nonimmunogenic, crosslinked matrix.
- the selected amino acid residues are lysine.
- the selected amino acid residues are cysteine.
- Yet another aspect of the invention relates to a crosslinkable composition
- a crosslinkable composition comprised of: (a) a first crosslinkable component having m nucleophilic groups, wherein m>2; and (b) a second crosslinkable component having n electrophilic groups capable of reaction with the m nucleophilic groups to form covalent bonds, wherein n>2 and m+n>5, the first component comprises two or more amino acid residues selected from the group consisting of amino acids comprising primary amine groups and amino acids comprising thiol groups, the second component comprises a polyethylene glycol moiety, the electrophilic groups are succinimidyl moieties, and each of the first and second crosslinkable components is biocompatible, synthetic, and nonimmunogenic, and further whererin crosslinking of the composition results in a biocompatible, nonimmunogenic, crosslinked matrix.
- the selected amino acid residues are lysine.
- the selected amino acid residues are cysteine.
- Still another aspect of the invention relates to a crosslinkable composition
- a crosslinkable composition comprised of: (a) a first crosslinkable component having m nucleophilic groups, wherein m>2; and (b) a second crosslinkable component having n electrophilic groups capable of reaction with the m nucleophilic groups to form covalent bonds, wherein n>2 and m+n>5, the first component comprises two or more amino acid residues selected from the group consisting of amino acids comprising primary amine groups and amino acids comprising thiol groups, the second component comprises a multifunctionally activated polyethylene glycol, and each of the first and second crosslinkable components is biocompatible, synthetic, and nonimmunogenic, and further wherein crosslinking of the composition results in a biocompatible, nonimmunogenic, crosslinked matrix.
- the selected amino acid residues are lysine.
- the selected amino acid residues are cysteine.
- Another aspect of the invention relates to a method of forming a three-dimensional matrix comprising the steps of: (a) providing a composition of the invention; and (b) rendering the nucleophilic and electrophilic groups reactive by exposing the composition to an aqueous environment to effect inter-reaction; wherein said exposure comprises: (i) dissolving the composition in a first buffer solution having a pH within the range of about 1.0 to 5.5 to form a homogeneous solution, and (ii) adding a second buffer solution having a pH within the range of about 6.0 to 11.0 to the homogeneous solution; and (c) allowing a three-dimensional matrix to form.
- a preferred composition for use in this method is the homogeneous dry powder composition.
- the three- dimensional matrix of the invention described immediately above may be formed without input of any external energy or by polymerization.
- the pH of the first buffer solution is selected to retard the reactivity of the nucleophilic groups on the first component by rendering the nucleophilic groups relatively non-nucleophilic.
- the second buffer solution neutralizes the effect of the first buffer solution, so that the nucleophilic groups of the first component regain their nucleophilic character and inter-react with the electrophilic groups of the second component.
- the composition, first buffer solution and second buffer solution are housed separately in a multiple-compartment syringe system having a multiple barrels, a mixing head, and an exit orifice; step (b)(i) comprises adding the first buffer solution to the barrel housing the composition to dissolve the composition and form a homogeneous solution, and extruding the homogeneous solution into the mixing head; step (b)(ii) comprises simultaneously extruding the second buffer solution into the mixing head; and step (c) further comprises extruding the resulting composition through the orifice onto a surface.
- Yet another aspect of the invention relates to a method of sealing tissue of a patient comprising the steps of: (a) providing a composition of the invention; (b) rendering the nucleophilic and electrophilic groups reactive by exposing the composition to an aqueous environment to effect inter-reaction; wherein said exposure comprises: (i) dissolving the composition in a first buffer solution having a pH within the range of about 1.0 to 5.5 to form a homogeneous solution, and (ii) adding a second buffer solution having a pH within the range of about 6.0 to 11.0 to the homogeneous solution to form a mixture; and (c) placing the mixture into contact with tissue and allowing a three- dimensional matrix to form and seal the tissue.
- a preferred composition for use in this method is the homogeneous dry powder composition.
- Still another aspect of the invention relates to a method of preventing adhesions between tissues of a patient comprising the steps of: (a) providing a composition of the invention; (b) rendering the nucleophilic and electrophilic groups reactive by exposing the composition to an aqueous environment to effect inter-reaction; wherein said exposure comprises: (i) dissolving the composition in a first buffer solution having a pH within the range of about 1.0 to 5.5 to form a homogeneous solution, and (ii) adding a second buffer solution having a pH within the range of about 6.0 to 1 1.0 to the homogeneous solution to form a mixture; and (c) placing the mixture into contact with tissue and allowing a three-dimensional matrix to form on the tissue.
- a preferred composition for use in this method is the homogeneous dry powder composition.
- a further aspect of the invention relates to a method of forming a three-dimensional matrix on a surface of a device comprising the steps of: (a) providing a composition of the invention; and (b) rendering the nucleophilic and electrophilic groups reactive by exposing the composition to an aqueous environment to effect inter-reaction; wherein said exposure comprises: (i) dissolving the composition in a first buffer solution having a pH within the range of about 1.0 to 5.5 to form a homogeneous solution, and (ii) adding a second buffer solution having a pH within the range of about 6.0 to 11.0 to the homogeneous solution; and applying the homogeneous solution to a surface of a device; and allowing the three-dimensional matrix to form.
- a preferred composition for use in this method is the homogeneous dry powder composition.
- Another aspect of the invention relates to a method of preventing scarring in the vicinity of a medical implant comprising the steps of: (a) providing a composition of the invention; (b) rendering the nucleophilic and electrophilic groups reactive by exposing the composition to an aqueous environment to effect inter-reaction; wherein said exposure comprises: (i) dissolving the composition in a first buffer solution having a pH within the range of about 1.0 to 5.5 to form a homogeneous solution, and (ii) adding a second buffer solution having a pH within the range of about 6.0 to 1 1.0 to the homogeneous solution to form a mixture; and applying the mixture to a surface of a medical implant and allowing a three-dimensional matrix to form on the surface of the medical implant; and (d) placing the medical implant into an animal host, wherein release of the anti-fibrotic agent from the composition inhibits scarring in the animal host.
- the anti-fibrotic agent is released into tissue in the vicinity of the implant after deployment of the implant.
- Yet another aspect of the invention relates to a method of promoting scarring in the vicinity of a medical implant comprising the steps of: (a) providing a composition of the invention; (b) rendering the nucleophilic and electrophilic groups reactive by exposing the composition to an aqueous environment to effect inter-reaction; wherein said exposure comprises: (i) dissolving the composition in a first buffer solution having a pH within the range of about 1.0 to 5.5 to form a homogeneous solution, and (ii) adding a second buffer solution having a pH within the range of about 6.0 to 11.0 to the homogeneous solution; and (c) applying the mixture to a surface of a medical implant and allowing a three-dimensional matrix to form on the surface of the medical implant; and (d) placing the medical implant into an animal host, wherein release of the fibrotic agent from the matrix inhibits scarring in the animal host.
- the fibrotic agent is released into tissue in the vicinity of the implant after deployment of the implant.
- a further aspect of the invention relates to a kit for use in medical applications, comprising: (a) a homogeneous dry powder composition comprised of: (i) a first component having a core substituted with m nucleophilic groups, where m>2; and (ii) a second component having a core substituted with n electrophilic groups, where n>2 and m+n>4; wherein the nucleophilic and electrophilic groups are non-reactive in a dry environment but are rendered reactive upon exposure to an aqueous environment such that the components inter-react in the aqueous environment to form a three-dimensional matrix; (b) a first buffer solution having a pH within the range of about 1.0 to 5.5; and (c) a second buffer solution having a pH within the range of about 6.0 to 11.0; wherein each component is packaged separately and admixed immediately prior to use. It is preferred of course that prior to use, each component is in a separate sterile package.
- kits for use in medical applications comprising: (a) a composition of the invention; (b) a first buffer solution having a pH within the range of about 1.0 to 5.5; and (c) a second buffer solution having a pH within the range of about 6.0 to 11.0, wherein each component is packaged separately and admixed immediately prior to use.
- a preferred composition of the invention for use in this kit is the homogeneous dry powder composition. It is preferred that each component of the kit is in a separate sterile package.
- the kit may further comprise a delivery device, which in one embodiment, may be a multicompartment device.
- a preferred multi-compartment device of the invention is a multiple- compartment syringe system having multiple barrels, a mixing head, and an exit orifice.
- the homogeneous dry powder composition, the first buffer solution, and the second buffer solution are housed separately in the multiple-compartment syringe system.
- the delivery device is a pressurized delivery system.
- a preferred pressurized delivery system comprises: a plurality of fluid component inlets each adapted to communicate with a source of different fluid components; at least one carrier fluid inlet adapted to communicate with a source of a pressurized carrier fluid; a diffuser surface located downstream from the plurality of fluid component inlets and the at least one carrier fluid inlet; and an outlet extending through the diffuser surface, wherein the diffuser surface is adapted to receive fluid components thereon and has a shape effective to direct and maintain each received fluid component in a different flow path toward the outlet for mixing and dispensing therethrough by the pressurized carrier fluid from the at least one carrier fluid inlet.
- a preferred pressurized carrier fluid is pressurized air and the preferred fluid components are the first buffer solution and the second buffer solution of the invention.
- kits for use in medical applications further comprises a biologically active agent and the medical application involves delivering the biologically active agent.
- the biologically active agent may be packaged with the homogeneous dry powder composition and may further comprise a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier packaged with the biologically active agent and the homogeneous dry powder composition.
- the biologically active agent may also be packaged as a solution with the first buffer or as a solution with the second buffer.
- the kit may further comprise a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier as a fourth component.
- the biologically active agent is packaged with the pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
- kit for use in medical applications further comprises living cells or genes, and the medical application involves delivering the living cells or genes.
- kit may be used for include adhering or sealing biological tissue, bioadhesion, ophthalmic applications, tissue augmentation, adhesion prevention, forming a synthetic implant or coating a synthetic implant, treatment of aneurysms, and laparoscopic procedures.
- kits for use in for use in medical applications comprising: (a) a first component having a core substituted with m nucleophilic groups, where m>2;
- a first buffer solution having a pH within the range of about 1.0 to 5.5
- a second buffer solution having a pH within the range of about 6.0 to 1 1.0, wherein the nucleophilic and electrophilic groups are non-reactive in a dry environment but are rendered reactive upon exposure to an aqueous environment such that the components inter-react in the aqueous environment to form a three- dimensional matrix and further wherein each component is packaged separately and admixed immediately prior to use.
- FIG 1 depicts a preferred multi-compartment syringe device of the present invention.
- FIGS. 2 and 3 schematically illustrate an embodiment of the pressurized delivery device of the present invention that includes a cap having an interior diffuser surface and a lumen assembly for delivering fluid components and a pressurized carrier fluid to the diffuser surface.
- FIG. 1 depicts the device in exploded view and
- FIG. 2 depicts the interior diffuser surface of the cap.
- a multifunctional compound refers not only to a single multifunctional compound but also to a combination of two or more of the same or different multifunctional compounds
- a reactive group refers to a combination of reactive groups as well as to a single reactive group, and the like.
- inter-react and “inter-reaction” as used herein refer to the formation of covalent bonds, noncovalent bonds, or both.
- the term thus includes crosslinking, which involves both intermolecular crosslinks and optionally intramolecular crosslinks as well, arising from the formation of covalent bonds. Entanglement is another example of non-covalent bonding that may result after inter-reaction between two or more reactive groups. Covalent bonding between two reactive groups may be direct in which case an atom in reactive group is directly bound to an atom in the other reactive group or it may be indirect through a linking group.
- Noncovalent bonds include ionic (electrostatic) bonds, hydrogen bonds, or the association of hydrophobic molecular segments, which may be the same or different.
- a crosslinked matrix may, in addition to covalent bonds, also include such intermolecular and/or intramolecular noncovalent bonds.
- hydrophilic and hydrophobic are generally defined in terms of an HLB value, i.e., a hydrophilic lipophilic balance.
- a high HLB value indicates a hydrophilic compound, while a low HLB value characterizes a hydrophobic compound.
- HLB values are well known in the art, and generally range from 1 to 18.
- Preferred multifunctional compound cores are hydrophilic, although as long as the multifunctional compound as a whole contains at least one hydrophilic component, crosslinkable hydrophobic components may also be present.
- polymer is used not only in the conventional sense to refer to molecules composed of repeating monomer units, including homopolymers, block copolymers, random copolymers, and graft copolymers, but also refers to polyfunctional small molecules that do not contain repeating monomer units but are "polymeric” in the sense of being "polyfunctional,” i.e., containing two or more functional groups. Accordingly, it will be appreciated that when the term “polymer” is used, difunctional and polyfunctional small molecules are included.
- Such moieties include, by way of example: the difunctional electrophiles disuccinimidyl suberate (DSS), bis(sulfosuccinimidyl) suberate (BS 3 ), dithiobis(succinimidylpropionate) (DSP), bis(2- succinimidooxy-carbonyloxy) ethyl sulfone (BSOCOES), 3,3'-dithiobis(sulfosuccinimidylpropionate (DTSSP); and the di- and polyfunctional nucleophiles ethylenediamine (H 2 N-CH 2 -CH 2 -NH 2 ), tetramethylene diamine (H 2 N-[CH 2 J 4 -NH 2 ), pentamethylene diamine (cadaverine) (H 2 N-[CH 2 ] 5 -NH 2 ), hexamethylene diamine (H 2 N-[CH 2 J 6 -NH 2 ), bos(2-aminoethyl)
- polymers herein are biocompatible and non-immunogenic.
- the polymers can be degradable or non-degradable. In a preferred mode, the polymers will be essentially non-degradable in vivo over a period of at least several months.
- synthetic is used to refer to polymers, compounds and other such materials that are “chemically synthesized.”
- a synthetic material in the present compositions may have a molecular structure that is identical to a naturally occurring material, but the material per se, as incorporated in the compositions of the invention, has been chemically synthesized in the laboratory or industrially.
- synthetic materials also include semi-synthetic materials, i.e., naturally occurring materials, obtained from a natural source, that have been chemically modified in some way.
- the synthetic materials herein are purely synthetic, i.e., they are neither semisynthetic nor have a structure that is identical to that of a naturally occurring material.
- tissue growth-promoting amount refers to the amount needed in order to stimulate tissue growth to a detectable degree.
- Tissue in this context, includes connective tissue, bone, cartilage, epidermis and dermis, blood, and other tissues. The actual amount that is determined to be an effective amount will vary depending on factors such as the size, condition, sex and age of the patient and can be more readily determined by the caregiver.
- in situ as used herein means at the site of administration.
- compositions of the invention can be injected or otherwise applied to a specific site within a patient's body, e.g., a site in need of augmentation, and allowed to crosslink at the site of injection.
- Suitable sites will generally be intradermal or subcutaneous regions for augmenting dermal support, at a bone fracture site for bone repair, within sphincter tissue for sphincter augmentation (e.g., for restoration of continence), within a wound or suture, to promote tissue regrowth; and within or adjacent to vessel anastomoses, to promote vessel regrowth.
- aqueous medium includes solutions, suspensions, dispersions, colloids, and the like containing water.
- aqueous environment means an environment containing an aqueous medium.
- dry environment means an environment that does not contain an aqueous medium.
- active agent biologically active agent
- therapeutic agent pharmaceutically active agent
- drug drug
- biologically active agent refers to an organic molecule that exerts biological effects in vivo.
- biologically active agent refers to an organic molecule that exerts biological effects in vivo.
- biologically active agent refers to an organic molecule that exerts biological effects in vivo.
- biologically active agent includes, by way of example and not limitation, enzymes, receptor antagonists or agonists, hormones, growth factors, autogenous bone marrow, antibiotics, antimicrobial agents and antibodies.
- biologically active agent is also intended to encompass various cell types and genes that can be incorporated into the compositions of the invention.
- Other examples of biologically active agents include those that inhibit fibrosis and those that promote fibrosis.
- a biologically active agent may promote adhesion between a tissue and a substrate (e.g., a surface of a medical device).
- Fibrosis refers to the formation of fibrous tissue in response to injury or medical intervention.
- Therapeutic agents which promote also referred to interchangeably herein as “induce,” “stimulate,” “cause,” and the like) fibrosis or scarring are referred to interchangeably herein as “fibrosis-inducing agents,” “scarring agents,” “fibrosing agents,” “adhesion-inducing agents,” and the like, where these agents do so through one or more mechanisms including: inducing or promoting angiogenesis, stimulating migration or proliferation of connective tissue cells (such as fibroblasts, smooth muscle cells, vascular smooth muscle cells), inducing ECM production, and/or promoting tissue remodeling.
- fibrosis-inhibiting agents which inhibit fibrosis or scarring are referred to herein as “fibrosis-inhibiting agents”, “anti-scarring agents”, and the like, where these agents inhibit fibrosis through one or more mechanisms including: inhibiting angiogenesis, inhibiting migration or proliferation of connective tissue cells (such as fibroblasts, smooth muscle cells, vascular smooth muscle cells), reducing ECM production, and/or inhibiting tissue remodeling.
- connective tissue cells such as fibroblasts, smooth muscle cells, vascular smooth muscle cells
- reducing ECM production and/or inhibiting tissue remodeling.
- tissue remodeling refers to a tissue reaction in which an irritant is applied locally to a tissue which results in an inflammatory reaction and is followed by scar tissue formation at the site of irritation.
- a pharmaceutical agent that induces or promotes sclerosis is referred to as a "sclerosant,” or a “sclerosing agent.”
- sclerosants include ethanol, dimethyl sulfoxide, surfactants (e.g., TRITON X, sorbitan monolaurate, sorbitan sesquioleate, glycerol monostearate and polyoxyethylene, polyoxyethylene cetyl ether, and the like), sucrose, sodium chloride, dextrose, glycerin, minocycline, tetracycline, doxycycline, polidocanol, sodium tetradecyl sulfate, sodium morrhuate, ethanolamine, phenol, sarapin and sotradecol.
- surfactants e.g., TRITON X, sorbitan monolaurate, sorbitan sesquioleate, glycerol monostearate and polyoxyethylene, polyoxyethylene cetyl ether,
- Anti-microtubule agents should be understood to include any protein, peptide, chemical, or other molecule which impairs the function of microtubules, for example, through the prevention or stabilization of polymerization.
- Compounds that stabilize polymerization of microtubules are referred to herein as "microtubule stabilizing agents.”
- a wide variety of methods may be utilized to determine the anti-microtubule activity of a particular compound, including for example, assays described by Smith et al. (Cancer Lett 79(2):213-219, 1994) and Mooberry et al., (Cancer Lett. 96(2):26 ⁇ -266, 1995).
- medical device used synonymously to refer to any object that is designed to be placed partially or wholly within a patient's body for one or more therapeutic or prophylactic purposes such as for restoring physiological function, alleviating symptoms associated with disease, delivering therapeutic agents, and/or repairing or replacing or augmenting damaged or diseased organs and tissues.
- some medical devices and implants include materials derived from animals (e.g., "xenografts” such as whole animal organs; animal tissues such as heart valves; naturally occurring or chemically-modified molecules such as collagen, hyaluronic acid, proteins, carbohydrates and others), human donors (e.g., "allografts” such as whole organs; tissues such as bone grafts, skin grafts and others), or from the patients themselves (e.g., "autografts” such as saphenous vein grafts, skin grafts, tendon/ligament/muscle transplants).
- animals e.g., "xenografts” such as whole animal organs; animal tissues such as heart valves; naturally occurring or chemically-modified molecules such as collagen, hyaluronic acid, proteins, carbohydrates and others
- human donors e.g., "allografts” such as whole organs; tissues such as bone grafts, skin grafts and others
- autografts such as sap
- alkyl refers to a branched or unbranched saturated hydrocarbon group typically although not necessarily containing 1 to about 24 carbon atoms, such as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, w-butyl, isobutyl, ?-butyl, octyl, decyl, and the like, as well as cycloalkyl groups such as cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl and the like. Generally, although again not necessarily, alkyl groups herein contain 1 to about 12 carbon atoms.
- lower alkyl intends an alkyl group of one to six carbon atoms, preferably one to four carbon atoms. "Substituted alkyl” refers to alkyl substituted with one or more substituent groups. "Alkylene,” “lower alkylene,” and “substituted alkylene” refer to divalent alkyl, lower alkyl, and substituted alkyl groups, respectively.
- aryl refers to an aromatic substituent containing a single aromatic ring (monocyclic) or multiple aromatic rings that are fused together, linked covalently, or linked to a common group such as a methylene or ethylene moiety.
- the common linking group may also be a carbonyl as in benzophenone, an oxygen atom as in diphenylether, or a nitrogen atom as in diphenylamine.
- Preferred aryl groups contain one aromatic ring or two fused or linked aromatic rings, e.g., phenyl, naphthyl, biphenyl, diphenylether, diphenylamine, benzophenone, and the like.
- Substituted aryl refers to an aryl moiety substituted with one or more substituent groups
- heteroatom-containing aryl and “heteroaryl” refer to aryl in which at least one carbon atom is replaced with a heteroatom.
- arylene and “substituted arylene” refer to divalent aryl and substituted aryl groups as just defined.
- heteroatom-containing as in a “heteroatom-containing hydrocarbyl group” refers to a molecule or molecular fragment in which one or more carbon atoms is replaced with an atom other than carbon, e.g., nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, phosphorus or silicon.
- Hydrocarbyl refers to univalent hydrocarbyl radicals containing 1 to about 30 carbon atoms, preferably 1 to about 24 carbon atoms, most preferably 1 to about 12 carbon atoms, including branched or unbranched, saturated or unsaturated species, such as alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, aryl groups, and the like.
- lower hydrocarbyl intends a hydrocarbyl group of one to six carbon atoms, preferably one to four carbon atoms.
- hydrocarbylene intends a divalent hydrocarbyl moiety containing 1 to about 30 carbon atoms, preferably 1 to about 24 carbon atoms, most preferably 1 to about 12 carbon atoms, including branched or unbranched, saturated or unsaturated species, or the like.
- lower hydrocarbylene intends a hydrocarbylene group of one to six carbon atoms, preferably one to four carbon atoms.
- Substituted hydrocarbyl refers to hydrocarbyl substituted with one or more substituent groups
- heteroatom-containing hydrocarbyl and heterohydrocarbyl refer to hydrocarbyl in which at least one carbon atom is replaced with a heteroatom.
- substituted hydrocarbylene refers to hydrocarbylene substituted with one or more substituent groups
- heteroatom-containing hydrocarbylene and “heterohydrocarbylene” refer to hydrocarbylene in which at least one carbon atom is replaced with a heteroatom. If not otherwise indicated, “hydrocarbyl” indicates unsubstituted hydrocarbyl, substituted hydrocarbyl, heteroatom-containing hydrocarbyl, and substituted heteroatom- containing hydrocarbyl.
- hydrocarbyl and hydrocarbylene include substituted hydrocarbyl and substituted hydrocarbylene, heteroatom-containing hydrocarbyl and heteroatom-containing hydrocarbylene, and substituted heteroatom-containing hydrocarbyl and substituted heteroatom-containing hydrocarbylene, respectively.
- substituted as in “substituted hydrocarbyl,” “substituted alkyl,” and the like, as alluded to in some of the aforementioned definitions, is meant that in the hydrocarbyl, alkyl, or other moiety, at least one hydrogen atom bound to a carbon atom is replaced with one or more substituents that are functional groups such as alkoxy, hydroxy, halo, nitro, and the like. Unless otherwise indicated, it is to be understood that specified molecular segments can be substituted with one or more substituents that do not compromise a compound's utility.
- succinimidyl is intended to include unsubstituted succinimidyl as well as sulfosuccinimidyl and other succinimidyl groups substituted on a ring carbon atom, e.g., with alkoxy substituents, polyether substituents, or the like.
- a composition that contains at least two biocompatible, non-immunogenic components having reactive groups thereon, with the functional groups selected so as to enable inter-reaction between the components, i.e., crosslinking to form a three-dimensional matrix.
- Each component has a core substituted with reactive groups.
- the composition will contain a first component having a core substituted with nucleophilic groups and a second component having a core substituted with electrophilic groups.
- the invention also encompasses compositions having more than two components, where additional components may have nucleophilic or electrophilic groups.
- the reactive groups are selected so that the components are essentially non-reactive in a dry environment. Upon exposure to an aqueous environment, the components are rendered reactive and a plurality of components is then able to inter-react in the aqueous environment to form a three- dimensional matrix.
- This matrix is preferably formed without input of any external energy, for example, at room temperature or at slightly elevated temperature.
- the composition is particularly suitable for application involving contact between a biological system and the composition and the three-dimensional matrix formed therefrom.
- the biological system can be a biological tissue, and in a preferred embodiment, is living tissue.
- the resulting three-dimensional matrix is useful in a variety of contexts, and is particularly useful as a biomaterial for medial applications, such as for bioadhesion, delivery of biologically active agents, tissue augmentation, tissue sealing, vascular sealing, needle hole sealing, hemostasis, the prevention of adhesions following a surgical procedure or injury, and so forth.
- the core and reactive groups can also be selected so as to provide components that have one of more of the following features: are biocompatible, are non-immunogenic, and do not leave any toxic, inflammatory or immunogenic reaction products at the site of administration.
- the core and reactive groups can also be selected so as to provide a resulting matrix that has one or more of these features.
- the reactive groups on the components of the composition begin to inter-react and form a three-dimensional matrix.
- the term "substantially immediately” is intended to mean within less than five minutes, preferably within less than two minutes, and the term “immediately” is intended to mean within less than one minute, preferably within less than 30 seconds.
- the three-dimensional composition will be completely formed within about 30 minutes.
- the components and the resulting matrix are not subject to enzymatic cleavage by matrix metalloproteinases such as collagenase, and are therefore not readily degradable in vivo.
- the composition may be readily tailored, in terms of the selection and quantity of each component, to enhance certain properties, e.g., compression strength, swel lability, tack, hydrophilicity, optical clarity, and the like.
- the homogeneous dry powder composition of the present invention is comprised of: a first component having a core substituted with nucleophilic groups and a second component having a core substituted with electrophilic groups.
- the nucleophilic and electrophilic groups are non-reactive with one another when the first and second components are admixed in a dry environment but are rendered reactive upon exposure to an aqueous environment such that the components inter-react in the aqueous environment to form a three-dimensional matrix.
- one component has a core substituted with m nucleophilic groups, where m>2, and the other component has a core substituted with n electrophilic groups, where n>2 and m+n>4.
- composition can be described as having components of formulas (I) and (II):
- Any additional components would have a formula such as [Z-(L 3 ) r ] s -R," where s is an integer from 2-6; R" is selected from hydrophilic polymers, hydrophobic polymers, amphiphilic polymers, C 2-M hydrocarbyls, and heteroatom-containing C 2-H hydrocarbyls; Z is a nucleophilic or electrophilic group; L 3 is a linking group; and r is an integer from 0-1.
- each side chain typically has one reactive group; howeverowever, the invention also encompasses components where the side chains can contain more than one reactive group.
- the first component may have the formula (I 1 ):
- the components are either commercially available or are readily synthesized by techniques that are well known in the art from commercially available materials.
- the composition Prior to use, the composition is stored in a dry environment that insures that the components remain essentially non-reactive until use. Upon exposure to an aqueous environment, the reactive groups on the components are rendered reactive and a plurality of components will then inter- react to form the desired matrix.
- the dry composition is preferably stored under an inert atmosphere so that the components do not react with oxygen.
- the concentration of the components will be in the range of about 1 to 50 wt%, generally about 2 to 40 wt%.
- the preferred concentration will depend on a number of factors, including the type of component (i.e., type of molecular core and reactive groups), its molecular weight, and the end use of the resulting three-dimensional matrix. For example, use of higher concentrations of the components, or using highly functional ized components, will result in the formation of a more tightly crosslinked network, producing a stiffer, more robust composition, such as for example a gel.
- the mechanical properties of the three-dimensional matrix should be similar to the mechanical properties of the tissue to which the matrix (or matrix-forming components) will be applied.
- the reactive groups are electrophilic and nucleophilic groups, which undergo a nucleophilic substitution reaction, a nucleophilic addition reaction, or both.
- electrophilic refers to a reactive group that is susceptible to nucleophilic attack, i.e., susceptible to reaction with an incoming nucleophilic group.
- Electrophilic groups herein are positively charged or electron-deficient, typically electron-deficient.
- nucleophilic refers to a reactive group that is electron rich, has an unshared pair of electrons acting as a reactive site, and reacts with a positively charged or electron-deficient site.
- X may be virtually any nucleophilic group, so long as reaction can occur with the electrophilic group Y and also with Z, when Z is present and is electrophilic.
- Y may be virtually any electrophilic group, so long as reaction can take place with X and also with Z, when Z is present and nucleophilic.
- the only limitation is a practical one, in that reaction between X and Y (and Z when present), should be fairly rapid and take place automatically upon admixture with an aqueous medium, without need for input of any external energy, e.g, heat, or potentially toxic or nonbiodegradable reaction catalysts or other chemical reagents. It is also preferred although not essential that reaction occur without need for ultraviolet or other radiation.
- the reactions between X and Y (and Z when present), are complete in under 60 minutes, preferably under 30 minutes. Most preferably, the reaction occurs in about 5 to 15 minutes or less.
- nucleophilic groups suitable as X include, but are not limited to, -NH 2 , -NHR 1 , -N(R') 2 , -SH, -OH, -COOH, -C 6 H 4 -OH, -H, -PH 2 , -PHR 1 , -P(R') 2 , -NH-NH 2 , -CO-NH-NH 2 , -C 5 H 4 N, etc.
- R 1 is a hydrocarbyl group and each Rl may be the same or different.
- R 1 is typically alkyl or monocyclic aryl, preferably alkyl, and most preferably lower alkyl.
- Organometallic moieties are also useful nucleophilic groups for the purposes of the invention, particularly those that act as carbanion donors. Examples of organometallic moieties include: Grignard functionalities - R 2 MgHaI wherein R 2 is a carbon atom (substituted or unsubstituted), and Hal is halo, typically bromo, iodo or chloro, preferably bromo; and lithium-containing functionalities, typically alkyllithium groups; sodium-containing functionalities.
- nucleophilic groups must be activated with a base so as to be capable of reaction with an electrophilic group.
- the compound when there are nucleophilic sulfhydryl and hydroxyl groups in the multifunctional compound, the compound must be admixed with an aqueous base in order to remove a proton and provide an -S " or -O " species to enable reaction with the electrophilic group.
- a non-nucleophilic base is preferred.
- the base may be present as a component of a buffer solution. Suitable bases and corresponding crosslinking reactions are described herein.
- electrophilic groups provided on the multifunctional compound must be made so that reaction is possible with the specific nucleophilic groups.
- the Y groups are selected so as to react with amino groups.
- the X reactive groups are sulfhydryl moieties
- the corresponding electrophilic groups are sulfhydryl-reactive groups, and the like.
- the amine-reactive groups contain an electrophilically reactive carbonyl group susceptible to nucleophilic attack by a primary or secondary amine, for example the carboxylic acid esters and aldehydes noted above, as well as carboxyl groups (-COOH).
- a carboxylic acid group per se is not susceptible to reaction with a nucleophilic amine, components containing carboxylic acid groups must be activated so as to be amine-reactive. Activation may be accomplished in a variety of ways, but often involves reaction with a suitable hydroxyl-containing compound in the presence of a dehydrating agent such as dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (DCC) or dicyclohexylurea (DHU).
- DCC dicyclohexylcarbodiimide
- DHU dicyclohexylurea
- a carboxylic acid can be reacted with an alkoxy-substituted N-hydroxy-succinimide or N-hydroxysulfosuccinimide in the presence of DCC to form reactive electrophilic groups, the N-hydroxysuccinimide ester and the N- hydroxysulfosuccinimide ester, respectively.
- Carboxylic acids may also be activated by reaction with an acyl halide such as an acyl chloride (e.g., acetyl chloride), to provide a reactive anhydride group.
- a carboxylic acid may be converted to an acid chloride group using, e.g., thionyl chloride or an acyl chloride capable of an exchange reaction.
- thionyl chloride or an acyl chloride capable of an exchange reaction Specific reagents and procedures used to carry out such activation reactions will be known to those of ordinary skill in the art and are described in the pertinent texts and literature.
- the amine-reactive groups are selected from succinimidyl ester (-O(CO)-N(COCH 2 ) 2 ), sulfosuccinimidyl ester (-O(CO)-N(COCH 2 ) 2 -S(O) 2 OH), maleimido (- N(COCH) 2 ), epoxy, isocyanato, thioisocyanato, and ethenesulfonyl.
- the electrophilic groups present on Y are groups that react with a sulfhydryl moiety.
- Such reactive groups include those that form thioester linkages upon reaction with a sulfhydryl group, such as those described in WO 00/62827 to Wallace et al.
- sulfhydryl reactive groups include, but are not limited to: mixed anhydrides; ester derivatives of phosphorus; ester derivatives of p-nitrophenol, p-nitrothiophenol and pentafluorophenol; esters of substituted hydroxylamines, including N-hydroxyphthalimide esters, N- hydroxysuccinimide esters, N-hydroxysulfosuccinimide esters, and N-hydroxyglutarimide esters; esters of 1-hydroxybenzotriazole; 3-hydroxy-3,4-dihydro-benzotriazin-4-one; 3-hydroxy-3,4-dihydro- quinazoline-4-one; carbonyl imidazole derivatives; acid chlorides; ketenes; and isocyanates.
- auxiliary reagents can also be used to facilitate bond formation, e.g., l-ethyl-3-[3-dimethylaminopropyl]carbodiimide can be used to facilitate coupling of sulfhydryl groups to carboxyl-containing groups.
- sulfhydryl reactive groups that form thioester linkages
- various other sulfhydryl reactive functionalities can be utilized that form other types of linkages.
- compounds that contain methyl imidate derivatives form imido-thioester linkages with sulfhydryl groups.
- sulfhydryl reactive groups can be employed that form disulfide bonds with sulfhydryl groups; such groups generally have the structure -S-S-Ar where Ar is a substituted or unsubstituted nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic moiety or a non-heterocyclic aromatic group substituted with an electron-withdrawing moiety, such that Ar may be, for example, 4-pyridinyl, o- nitrophenyl, m-nitrophenyl, p-nitrophenyl, 2,4-dinitrophenyl, 2-nitro-4-benzoic acid, 2-nitro-4- pyridinyl, etc.
- auxiliary reagents i.e., mild oxidizing agents such as hydrogen peroxide can be used to facilitate disulfide bond formation.
- sulfhydryl reactive groups forms thioether bonds with sulfhydryl groups.
- groups include, inter alia, maleimido, substituted maleimido, haloalkyl, epoxy, imino, and aziridino, as well as olefins (including conjugated olefins) such as ethenesulfonyl, etheneimino, acrylate, methacrylate, and ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated aldehydes and ketones.
- the electrophilic functional groups on the remaining component(s) must react with hydroxyl groups.
- the hydroxyl group may be activated as described above with respect to carboxylic acid groups, or it may react directly in the presence of base with a sufficiently reactive electrophilic group such as an epoxide group, an aziridine group, an acyl halide, an anhydride, and so forth.
- X is an organometallic nucleophilic group such as a Grignard functionality or an alkyllithium group
- suitable electrophilic functional groups for reaction therewith are those containing carbonyl groups, including, by way of example, ketones and aldehydes.
- nucleophilic or electrophilic groups can react as nucleophilic or as electrophilic groups, depending on the selected reaction partner and/or the reaction conditions.
- a carboxylic acid group can act as a nucleophilic group in the presence of a fairly strong base, but generally acts as an electrophilic group allowing nucleophilic attack at the carbonyl carbon and concomitant replacement of the hydroxyl group with the incoming nucleophilic group.
- the homogeneous dry powder may be compression molded into a thin sheet or membrane, which can then be sterilized using gamma or e-beam irradiation.
- the resulting dry membrane or sheet can be cut to the desired size or chopped into smaller size particulates.
- the reactive groups may be directly attached to the core, or they may be indirectly attached through a linking group, with longer linking groups also termed "chain extenders.”
- chain extenders In the formulas (I) and (II) shown above, the optional linker groups are represented by L 1 and L 2 , wherein the linking groups are present when p and q are equal to 1.
- linking groups are well known in the art. See, for example, WO 97/22371 to Rhee et al. Linking groups are useful to avoid steric hindrance problems that can sometimes associated with the formation of direct linkages between molecules. Linking groups may additionally be used to link several multifunctional compounds together to make larger molecules. In one embodiment, a linking group can be used to alter the degradative properties of the compositions after administration and resultant gel formation. For example, linking groups can be used to promote hydrolysis, to discourage hydrolysis, or to provide a site for enzymatic degradation.
- linking groups that provide hydrolyzable sites, include, inter alia: ester linkages; anhydride linkages, such as those obtained by incorporation of glutarate and succinate; ortho ester linkages; ortho carbonate linkages such as trimethylene carbonate; amide linkages; phosphoester linkages; ⁇ -hydroxy acid linkages, such as those obtained by incorporation of lactic acid and glycolic acid; lactone-based linkages, such as those obtained by incorporation of caprolactone, valerolactone, ⁇ -butyrolactone and p-dioxanone; and amide linkages such as in a dimeric, oligomeric, or poly(amino acid) segment.
- non-degradable linking groups include succinimide, propionic acid and carboxymethylate linkages. See, for example, WO 99/07417 to Coury et al.
- enzymatically degradable linkages include Leu-Gly-Pro-Ala, which is degraded by collagenase; and Gly-Pro-Lys, which is degraded by plasmin.
- Linking groups can also be included to enhance or suppress the reactivity of the various reactive groups.
- electron-withdrawing groups within one or two carbons of a sulfhydryl group would be expected to diminish its effectiveness in coupling, due to a lowering of nucleophilicity. Carbon-carbon double bonds and carbonyl groups will also have such an effect.
- electron-withdrawing groups adjacent to a carbonyl group e.g., the reactive carbonyl of glutaryl-N-hydroxysuccinimidyl
- sterically bulky groups in the vicinity of a reactive group can be used to diminish reactivity and thus reduce the coupling rate as a result of steric hindrance.
- x is generally in the range of 1 to about 10;
- R 2 is generally hydrocarbyl, typically alkyl or aryl, preferably alkyl, and most preferably lower alkyl; and
- R 3 is hydrocarbylene, heteroatom-containing hydrocarbylene, substituted hydrocarbylene, or substituted heteroatom- containing hydrocarbylene) typically alkylene or arylene (again, optionally substituted and/or containing a heteroatom), preferably lower alkylene (e.g., methylene, ethylene, n-propylene, n- butylene, etc.), phenylene, or amidoalkylene (e.g., -(CO)-NH-CH 2 ).
- lower alkylene e.g., methylene, ethylene, n-propylene, n- butylene, etc.
- phenylene or amidoalkylene (e.g., -(CO)-NH-CH 2 ).
- linking groups are as follows. If a higher molecular weight multifunctional compound is to be used, it will preferably have biodegradable linkages as described above, so that fragments larger than 20,000 mol. wt. are not generated during resorption in the body. In addition, to promote water miscibility and/or solubility, it may be desired to add sufficient electric charge or hydrophilicity. Hydrophilic groups can be easily introduced using known chemical synthesis, so long as they do not give rise to unwanted swelling or an undesirable decrease in compressive strength. In particular, polyalkoxy segments may weaken gel strength. 3. THE CORE
- the "core" of each component is comprised of the molecular structure to which the reactive groups are bound.
- the molecular core can be a polymer, which includes synthetic polymers and naturally occurring polymers.
- the polymers can be hydrophilic, hydrophobic, or amphiphilic.
- the molecular core can also be a low molecular weight component such as a C 2- i 4 hydrocarbyl or a heteroatom-containing C 2-M hydrocarbyl.
- the heteroatom-containing C 2-H hydrocarbyl can have 1 or 2 heteroatoms selected from N, O and S.
- the molecular core is a synthetic hydrophilic polymer.
- hydrophilic polymer refers to a polymer having an average molecular weight and composition that naturally renders, or is selected to render the polymer as a whole "hydrophilic.” Preferred polymers are highly pure or are purified to a highly pure state such that the polymer is or is treated to become pharmaceutically pure. Most hydrophilic polymers can be rendered water soluble by incorporating a sufficient number of oxygen (or less frequently nitrogen) atoms available for forming hydrogen bonds in aqueous solutions.
- Synthetic hydrophilic polymers may be homopolymers, block copolymers, random copolymers, or graft copolymers.
- the polymer may be linear or branched, and if branched, may be minimally to highly branched, dendrimeric, hyperbranched, or a star polymer.
- the polymer may include biodegradable segments and blocks, either distributed throughout the polymer's molecular structure or present as a single block, as in a block copolymer. Biodegradable segments are those that degrade so as to break covalent bonds. Typically, biodegradable segments are segments that are hydrolyzed in the presence of water and/or enzymatically cleaved in situ.
- Biodegradable segments may be composed of small molecular segments such as ester linkages, anhydride linkages, ortho ester linkages, ortho carbonate linkages, amide linkages, phosphonate linkages, etc.
- Larger biodegradable "blocks" will generally be composed of oligomeric or polymeric segments incorporated within the hydrophilic polymer.
- Illustrative oligomeric and polymeric segments that are biodegradable include, by way of example, poly(amino acid) segments, poly(orthoester) segments, poly(orthocarbonate) segments, and the like.
- Synthetic hydrophilic polymers that are useful herein include, but are not limited to: polyalkylene oxides, particularly polyethylene glycol (PEG) and poly(ethylene oxide)-poly(propylene oxide) copolymers, including block and random copolymers; polyols such as glycerol, polyglycerol (PG) and particularly highly branched polyglycerol, propylene glycol; poly(oxyalkylene)-substituted diols, and poly(oxyalkylene)-substituted polyols such as mono-, di- and tri-polyoxyethylated glycerol, mono- and di-polyoxyethylated propylene glycol, and mono- and di-polyoxyethylated trimethylene glycol; polyoxyethylated sorbitol, polyoxyethylated glucose; poly(acrylic acids) and analogs and copolymers thereof, such as polyacrylic acid per se, polymeth
- molecular weight refers to the weight average molecular weight of a number of molecules in any given sample, as commonly used in the art.
- a sample of PEG 2,000 might contain a statistical mixture of polymer molecules ranging in weight from, for example, 1,500 to 2,500 daltons with one molecule differing slightly from the next over a range.
- Specification of a range of molecular weights indicates that the average molecular weight may be any value between the limits specified, and may include molecules outside those limits.
- a molecular weight range of about 800 to about 20,000 indicates an average molecular weight of at least about 800, ranging up to about 2O kDa.
- suitable synthetic hydrophilic polymers include chemically synthesized polypeptides, particularly polynucleophilic polypeptides that have been synthesized to incorporate amino acids containing primary amino groups (such as lysine) and/or amino acids containing thiol groups (such as cysteine).
- Poly(lysine) a synthetically produced polymer of the amino acid lysine (145 MW), is particularly preferred.
- Poly(lysine)s have been prepared having anywhere from 6 to about 4,000 primary amino groups, corresponding to molecular weights of about 870 to about 580,000.
- Poly(lysine)s for use in the present invention preferably have a molecular weight within the range of about 1,000 to about 300,000, more preferably within the range of about 5,000 to about 100,000, and most preferably, within the range of about 8,000 to about 15,000.
- Poly(lysine)s of varying molecular weights are commercially available from Peninsula Laboratories, Inc. (Belmont, California.).
- preferred synthetic hydrophilic polymers are PEG and PG, particularly highly branched PG.
- PEG polyethylene glycol
- a particularly preferred synthetic hydrophilic polymer for certain applications is a PEG having a molecular weight within the range of about 100 to about 100,000, although for highly branched PEG, far higher molecular weight polymers can be employed, up to 1,000,000 or more, providing that biodegradable sites are incorporated ensuring that all degradation products will have a molecular weight of less than about 30,000.
- the preferred molecular weight is about 1,000 to about 20,000, more preferably within the range of about 7,500 to about 20,000.
- the polyethylene glycol has a molecular weight of approximately 10,000.
- Naturally occurring hydrophilic polymers include, but are not limited to: proteins such as collagen, fibronectin, albumins, globulins, fibrinogen, fibrin and thrombin, with collagen particularly preferred; carboxylated polysaccharides such as polymannuronic acid and polygalacturonic acid; aminated polysaccharides, particularly the glycosaminoglycans, e.g., hyaluronic acid, chitin, chondroitin sulfate A, B, or C, keratin sulfate, keratosulfate and heparin; and activated polysaccharides such as dextran and starch derivatives.
- Collagen and glycosaminoglycans are preferred naturally occurring hydrophilic polymers for use herein.
- collagen refers to all forms of collagen, including those, which have been processed or otherwise modified.
- collagen from any source may be used in the compositions of the invention; for example, collagen may be extracted and purified from human or other mammalian source, such as bovine or porcine corium and human placenta, or may be recombinantly or otherwise produced.
- the preparation of purified, substantially non-antigenic collagen in solution from bovine skin is well known in the art.
- U.S. Patent No. 5,428,022 to Palefsky et al. discloses methods of extracting and purifying collagen from the human placenta
- Collagen of any type including, but not limited to, types I, II, III, IV, or any combination thereof, may be used in the compositions of the invention, although type I is generally preferred.
- Either atelopeptide or telopeptide-containing collagen may be used; however, when collagen from a source, such as bovine collagen, is used, atelopeptide collagen is generally preferred, because of its reduced immunogenicity compared to telopeptide-containing collagen.
- Collagen that has not been previously crosslinked by methods such as heat, irradiation, or chemical crosslinking agents is preferred for use in the invention, although previously crosslinked collagen may be used.
- Collagens for use in the present invention are generally, although not necessarily, in aqueous suspension at a concentration between about 20 mg/ml to about 120 mg/ml, preferably between about 30 mg/ml to about 90 mg/ml.
- intact collagen is preferred, denatured collagen, commonly known as gelatin, can also be used.
- Gelatin may have the added benefit of being degradable faster than collagen.
- Nonfibrillar collagen is generally preferred for use in compositions of the invention, although fibrillar collagens may also be used.
- nonfibrillar collagen refers to any modified or unmodified collagen material that is in substantially nonfibrillar form, i.e., molecular collagen that is not tightly associated with other collagen molecules so as to form fibers.
- a solution of nonfibrillar collagen is more transparent than is a solution of fibrillar collagen.
- Collagen types that are nonfibrillar (or microfibrillar) in native form include types IV, VI, and VII.
- Chemically modified collagens that are in nonfibrillar form at neutral pH include succinylated collagen and methylated collagen, both of which can be prepared according to the methods described in U.S. Patent No. 4,164,559 to Miyata et al.
- Methylated collagen which contains reactive amine groups, is a preferred nucleophile-containing component in the compositions of the present invention.
- methylated collagen is a component that is present in addition to first and second components in the matrix-forming reaction of the present invention. Methylated collagen is described in, for example, in U.S. Patent No. 5,614,587 to Rhee et al.
- Collagens for use in the compositions of the present invention may start out in fibrillar form, then can be rendered nonfibrillar by the addition of one or more fiber disassembly agent.
- the fiber disassembly agent must be present in an amount sufficient to render the collagen substantially nonfibrillar at pH 7, as described above.
- Fiber disassembly agents for use in the present invention include, without limitation, various biocompatible alcohols, amino acids, inorganic salts, and carbohydrates, with biocompatible alcohols being particularly preferred.
- Preferred biocompatible alcohols include glycerol and propylene glycol.
- Non-biocompatible alcohols such as ethanol, methanol, and isopropanol
- Preferred amino acids include arginine
- Preferred inorganic salts include sodium chloride and potassium chloride.
- carbohydrates such as various sugars including sucrose, may be used in the practice of the present invention, they are not as preferred as other types of fiber disassembly agents because they can have cytotoxic effects in vivo.
- Fibrillar collagen is less preferred for use in the compositions of the present invention; however, as disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 5,614,587 to Rhee et al., fibrillar collagen, or mixtures of nonfibrillar and fibrillar collagen, may be preferred for use in adhesive compositions intended for long-term persistence in vivo.
- the core of the components may also comprise a hydrophobic polymer, including low molecular weight polyfunctional species; although for most uses hydrophilic polymers are preferred.
- hydrophobic polymers herein contain a relatively small proportion of oxygen and/or nitrogen atoms.
- Preferred hydrophobic polymers for use in the invention generally have a carbon chain that is no longer than about 14 carbons. Polymers having carbon chains substantially longer than 14 carbons generally have very poor solubility in aqueous solutions and, as such, have very long reaction times when mixed with aqueous solutions of synthetic polymers containing multiple nucleophilic groups. Thus, use of short-chain oligomers can avoid solubility-related problems during reaction.
- Polylactic acid and polyglycolic acid are examples of two particularly suitable hydrophobic polymers.
- amphiphilic polymers have a hydrophilic portion and a hydrophobic (or lipophilic) portion.
- the hydrophilic portion can be at one end of the core and the hydrophobic portion at the opposite end, or the hydrophilic and hydrophobic portions may be distributed randomly (random copolymer) or in the form of sequences or grafts (block copolymer) to form the amphiphilic polymer core of the components.
- the hydrophilic and hydrophobic portions may include any of the aforementioned hydrophilic and hydrophobic polymers.
- amphiphilic polymer core can be a hydrophilic polymer that has been modified with hydrophobic moieties (e.g., alkylated PEG or a hydrophilic polymer modified with one or more fatty chains), or a hydrophobic polymer that has been modified with hydrophilic moieties (e.g., "PEGylated” phospholipids such as polyethylene glycolated phospholipids).
- hydrophobic moieties e.g., alkylated PEG or a hydrophilic polymer modified with one or more fatty chains
- hydrophobic polymer that has been modified with hydrophilic moieties e.g., "PEGylated” phospholipids such as polyethylene glycolated phospholipids.
- the molecular core of the component can also be a low molecular weight compound, defined herein as being a C 2-M hydrocarbyl or a heteroatom-containing C 2-M hydrocarbyl, which contains 1 to 2 heteroatoms selected from N, O, S and combinations thereof.
- a molecular core can be substituted with any of the reactive groups described herein.
- Alkanes are suitable C 2 . ⁇ hydrocarbyl molecular cores.
- alkanes for substituted with a nucleophilic primary amino group and a Y electrophilic group, include, ethyleneamine (H 2 N- CH 2 CH 2 -Y), tetramethyleneamine (H 2 N-(CHi)-Y), pentamethyleneamine (H 2 N-(CH 5 )-Y), and hexamethyleneamine (H 2 N-(CH 6 )-Y).
- ethyleneamine H 2 N- CH 2 CH 2 -Y
- tetramethyleneamine H 2 N-(CHi)-Y
- pentamethyleneamine H 2 N-(CH 5 )-Y
- hexamethyleneamine H 2 N-(CH 6 )-Y
- Low molecular weight diols and polyols are also suitable C 2 - 14 hydrocarbyls and include trimethylolpropane, di(trimethylol propane), pentaerythritol, and diglycerol.
- Polyacids are also suitable C 2-I4 hydrocarbyls, and include trimethylolpropane-based tricarboxylic acid, di(trimethylol propane)-based tetracarboxylic acid, heptanedioic acid, octanedioic acid (suberic acid), and hexadecanedioic acid (thapsic acid).
- Low molecular weight di- and poly-electrophiles are suitable heteroatom-containing C 2-H hydrocarbyl molecular cores. These include, for example, disuccinimidyl suberate (DSS), bis(sulfosuccinimidyl) suberate (BS 3 ), dithiobis(succinimidylpropionate) (DSP), bis(2- succinimidooxycarbonyloxy) ethyl sulfone (BSOCOES), and 3,3'- dithiobis(sulfosuccinimidylpropionate (DTSPP), and their analogs and derivatives.
- DSS disuccinimidyl suberate
- BS 3 bis(sulfosuccinimidyl) suberate
- DSP dithiobis(succinimidylpropionate)
- BSOCOES bis(2- succinimidooxycarbonyloxy) ethyl sulfone
- DTSPP 3,3
- the components are readily synthesized to contain a hydrophilic, hydrophobic or amphiphilic polymer core or a low molecular weight core, functional ized with the desired functional groups, i.e., nucleophilic or electrophilic groups, which enable crosslinking.
- a hydrophilic, hydrophobic or amphiphilic polymer core or a low molecular weight core functionalized with the desired functional groups, i.e., nucleophilic or electrophilic groups, which enable crosslinking.
- PEG polyethylene glycol
- Multi-functionalized forms of PEG are of particular interest and include, PEG succinimidyl glutarate, PEG succinimidyl propionate, succinimidyl butylate, PEG succinimidyl acetate, PEG succinimidyl succinamide, PEG succinimidyl carbonate, PEG propionaldehyde, PEG glycidyl ether, PEG-isocyanate, and PEG-vinylsulfone.
- Many such forms of PEG are described in U.S. Patent No. 5,328,955 and 6,534,591, both to Rhee et al.
- Multi-amino PEGs useful in the present invention include the Jeffamine diamines ("D” series) and triamines ("T” series), which contain two and three primary amino groups per molecule.
- Analogous poly(sulfhydryl) PEGs are also available from Nektar Therapeutics, e.g., in the form of pentaerythritol poly(ethylene glycol) ether tetra-sulfhydryl (molecular weight 10,000).
- Reaction with succinimidyl groups to convert terminal hydroxyl groups to reactive esters is one technique for preparing a core with electrophilic groups suitable for reaction with nucleophilic groups such as primary amines, thiols, and hydroxyl groups.
- nucleophilic groups such as primary amines, thiols, and hydroxyl groups.
- Other agents to convert hydroxyl groups include carbonyldiimidazole and sulfonyl chloride; however, as discussed herein, a wide variety of electrophilic groups may be advantageously employed for reaction with corresponding nucleophilic groups.
- the components of the invention can be included in a pharmaceutical composition.
- a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier may also be included.
- tensile strength enhancer In order to enhance matrix strength, it may be generally desirable to add a "tensile strength enhancer" to the composition.
- Such tensile strength enhancers preferably comprise micron-size, preferably 5 to 40 microns in diameter and 20 to 5000 microns in length, high tensile strength fibers, usually with glass transition temperatures well above 37°C.
- Suitable tensile strength enhancers for use with the multifunctional compound of the present invention include, inter alia, collagen fibers, synthetic polymer fibers, as well as other organic tensile strength enhancers and inorganic tensile strength enhancers.
- the synthetic polymer fibers can be either degradable or non-degradable.
- the synthetic polymeric fibers are degradable. These degradable polymer fibers may comprise polyesters, polyamides, poly(ortho esters), poly(anhydrides), poly(phosphazines), poly(urethanes), poly(carbonates) and poly(dioxanones) as well as copolymers and blends thereof.
- a particularly useful tensile strength enhancer is Vicryl® (90: 10 copolymer of glycolide and lactide).
- tensile strength enhancers which are part of the broader category of "fillers.”
- silicone gums when cross-linked with peroxides, are weak gels with tensile strength on the order of only about 34 N/cm 2 .
- the tensile strength of these gums may increase as much as fifty-fold. Lichtenwalner et al., Eds., Encyclopedia of Polymer
- Suitable tensile strength enhancers are those that have inherent high tensile strength and also can interact by covalent or non- covalent bonds with the three-dimensional matrix. The tensile strength enhancer should bond to the matrix, either mechanically or covalently, in order to provide tensile support.
- Tensile strengths of polyglycolide resorbable sutures are approximately 89,000 N/cm 2 ; that of collagen fibers is 5000-
- the components can also be prepared to contain various imaging agents such as iodine, water soluble iodo derivative, or barium sulfate, or fluorine, in order to aid visualization of the compositions after administration via X-ray or l9 F-MRI, respectively.
- imaging agents such as iodine, water soluble iodo derivative, or barium sulfate, or fluorine
- proteins such as albumin, fibrin or fibrinogen
- hydrocolloids such as carboxymethylcellulose may promote tissue adhesion and/or swellability.
- the crosslinkable composition may be comprised of: (a) a first crosslinkable component having m nucleophilic groups, wherein m>2; and (b) a second crosslinkable component having n electrophilic groups capable of reaction with the m nucleophilic groups to form covalent bonds, wherein n>2 and m+n>5, the first component comprises two or more amino acid residues selected from the group consisting of amino acids comprising primary amine groups and amino acids comprising thiol groups, the second component comprises a polyethylene glycol moiety, and each of the first and second crosslinkable components is biocompatible, synthetic, and nonimmunogenic, and further wherein crosslinking of the composition results in a biocompatible, nonimmunogenic, crosslinked matrix.
- the selected amino acid residues are lysine.
- the selected amino acid residues are cysteine.
- the crosslinkable composition may also be comprised of a crosslinkable composition comprised of: (a) a first crosslinkable component having m nucleophilic groups, wherein m>2; and (b) a second crosslinkable component having n electrophilic groups capable of reaction with the m nucleophilic groups to form covalent bonds, wherein n>2 and m+n>5, the first component comprises two or more amino acid residues selected from the group consisting of amino acids comprising primary amine groups and amino acids comprising thiol groups, the second component comprises a polyethylene glycol moiety, the electrophilic groups are succinimidyl moieties, and each of the first and second crosslinkable components is biocompatible, synthetic, and nonimmunogenic, and further whererin crosslinking of the composition results in a biocompatible, nonimmunogenic, crosslinked matrix.
- the selected amino acid residues are lysine.
- the selected amino acid residues are cysteine.
- the crosslinkable composition may also be comprised of: (a) a first crosslinkable component having m nucleophilic groups, wherein m>2; and (b) a second crosslinkable component having n electrophilic groups capable of reaction with the m nucleophilic groups to form covalent bonds, wherein n>2 and m+n>5, the first component comprises two or more amino acid residues selected from the group consisting of amino acids comprising primary amine groups and amino acids comprising thiol groups, the second component comprises a multifunctional Iy activated polyethylene glycol, and each of the first and second crosslinkable components is biocompatible, synthetic, and nonimmunogenic, and further wherein crosslinking of the composition results in a biocompatible, nonimmunogenic, crosslinked matrix.
- the selected amino acid residues are lysine.
- the selected amino acid residues are cysteine.
- the crosslinkable composition may also be comprised of: (a) a first crosslinkable component having m nucleophilic groups, wherein m>2; and (b) a second crosslinkable component having n electrophilic groups capable of reaction with the m nucleophilic groups to form covalent bonds, wherein n>2 and m+n>5, the first component comprises two or more amino acid residues selected from the group consisting of lysine and cysteine, the second component comprises a polyethylene glycol moiety, and each of the first and second crosslinkable components is biocompatible, synthetic, and nonimmunogenic, and crosslinking of the composition results in a biocompatible, nonimmunogenic, crosslinked matrix.
- the crosslinkable composition may also be comprised of: (a) a first crosslinkable component having m nucleophilic groups, wherein m>2; and (b) a second crosslinkable component having n electrophilic groups capable of reaction with the m nucleophilic groups to form covalent bonds, wherein n>2 and m+n>5, the first component comprises two or more lysine residues, the second component comprises a polyethylene glycol moiety, and each of the first and second crosslinkable components is biocompatible, synthetic, and nonimmunogenic, and crosslinking of the composition results in a biocompatible, nonimmunogenic, crosslinked matrix.
- the crosslinkable composition may also be comprised of: (a) a first crosslinkable component having m nucleophilic groups, wherein m>2; and (b) a second crosslinkable component having n electrophilic groups capable of reaction with the m nucleophilic groups to form covalent bonds, wherein n>2 and m+n>5, the first component consists of lysine residues, the second component comprises a polyethylene glycol moiety, and each of the first and second crosslinkable components is biocompatible, synthetic, and nonimmunogenic, and crosslinking of the composition results in a biocompatible, nonimmunogenic, crosslinked matrix.
- a crosslinkable composition comprised of: (a) a first crosslinkable component having m nucleophilic groups, wherein m>2; and (b) a second crosslinkable component having n electrophilic groups capable of reaction with the m nucleophilic groups to form covalent bonds, wherein n>2 and m+n>5, the first component comprises two or more cysteine residues, the second component comprises a polyethylene glycol moiety, and each of the first and second crosslinkable components is biocompatible, synthetic, and nonimmunogenic, and crosslinking of the composition results in a biocompatible, nonimmunogenic, crosslinked matrix.
- the crosslinkable composition may also be comprised of: (a) a first crosslinkable component having m nucleophilic groups, wherein m>2; and (b) a second crosslinkable component having n electrophilic groups capable of reaction with the m nucleophilic groups to form covalent bonds, wherein n>2 and m+n>5, wherein the first component consists of cysteine residues, the second component comprises a polyethylene glycol moiety, and each of the first and second crosslinkable components is biocompatible, synthetic, and nonimmunogenic, and crosslinking of the composition results in a biocompatible, nonimmunogenic, crosslinked matrix.
- the crosslinkable composition may also be comprised of: (a) a first crosslinkable component having m nucleophilic groups, wherein m>2; and (b) a second crosslinkable component having n electrophilic groups capable of reaction with the m nucleophilic groups to form covalent bonds, wherein n>2 and m+n>5, the first component comprises two or more amino acid residues selected from the group consisting of lysine and cysteine, the second component comprises a polyethylene glycol moiety, the electrophilic groups are succinimidyl moieties, and each of the first and second crosslinkable components is biocompatible, synthetic, and nonimmunogenic, and crosslinking of the composition results in a biocompatible, nonimmunogenic, crosslinked matrix.
- the crosslinkable composition may also be comprised of: (a) a first crosslinkable component having m nucleophilic groups, wherein m>2; and (b) a second crosslinkable component having n electrophilic groups capable of reaction with the m nucleophilic groups to form covalent bonds, wherein n>2 and m+n>5, the first component comprises two or more lysine residues, the second component comprises a polyethylene glycol moiety, the electrophilic groups are succinimidyl moieties, and each of the first and second crosslinkable components is biocompatible, synthetic, and nonimmunogenic, and crosslinking of the composition results in a biocompatible, nonimmunogenic, crosslinked matrix.
- the crosslinkable composition may also be comprised of: (a) a first crosslinkable component having m nucleophilic groups, wherein m>2; and (b) a second crosslinkable component having n electrophilic groups capable of reaction with the m nucleophilic groups to form covalent bonds, wherein n>2 and m+n>5, the first component consists of lysine residues, the second component comprises a polyethylene glycol moiety, the electrophilic groups are succinimidyl moieties, and each of the first and second crosslinkable components is biocompatible, synthetic, and nonimmunogenic, and crosslinking of the composition results in a biocompatible, nonimmunogenic, crosslinked matrix.
- the crosslinkable composition may also be comprised of: (a) a first crosslinkable component having m nucleophilic groups, wherein m>2; and (b) a second crosslinkable component having n electrophilic groups capable of reaction with the m nucleophilic groups to form covalent bonds, wherein n>2 and m+n>5, the first component comprises two or more cysteine residues, the second component comprises a polyethylene glycol moiety, the electrophilic groups are succinimidyl moieties, and each of the first and second crosslinkable components is biocompatible, synthetic, and nonimmunogenic, and crosslinking of the composition results in a biocompatible, non immunogenic, crosslinked matrix.
- the crosslinkable composition may also be comprised of: (a) a first crosslinkable component having m nucleophilic groups, wherein m>2; (b) a second crosslinkable component having n electrophilic groups capable of reaction with the m nucleophilic groups to form covalent bonds, wherein n>2 and m+n>5, the first component consists of cysteine residues, the second component comprises a polyethylene glycol moiety, the electrophilic groups are succinimidyl moieties, and each of the first and second crosslinkable components is biocompatible, synthetic, and nonimmunogenic, and crosslinking of the composition results in a biocompatible, nonimmunogenic, crosslinked matrix.
- the invention is also directed at a method of formulating an in-situ curing composition.
- This method involves a delayed activation/triggering/initiation of the reaction between the reactive groups, generating a cured composition with consistent and uniform strength.
- the composition may be administered before, during or after the components inter-react in the aqueous environment to form a three-dimensional matrix.
- the point at which inter-reaction has reached equilibrium is defined herein as the point at which the composition no longer feels tacky or sticky to the touch.
- composition of the present invention is generally delivered to the site of administration in such a way that the individual reactive groups of the compounds are exposed to the aqueous environment for the first time at the site of administration, or immediately preceding administration.
- composition is preferably delivered to the site of administration using an apparatus that allows the composition to be delivered in an dry environment, where the compounds are essentially non-reactive.
- a three-dimensional matrix is formed by the steps of:
- composition of the invention (a) providing a composition of the invention; (b) rendering the nucleophilic and electrophilic groups reactive by exposing the composition to an aqueous environment to effect inter-reaction; wherein said exposure comprises: (i) dissolving the composition in a first buffer solution having a pH within the range of about 1.0 to 5.5 to form a homogeneous solution, and (ii) adding a second buffer solution having a pH within the range of about 6.0 to 1 1.0 to the homogeneous solution; and (c) allowing a three-dimensional matrix to form.
- the matrix is formed, e.g., by polymerization, without input of any external energy.
- the first and second components of the composition are typically combined in amounts such that the number of nucleophilic groups in the mixture is approximately equal to the number of electrophilic groups in the mixture.
- the term “approximately” refers to a 2: 1 to 1 :2 ratio of moles of nucleophilic groups to moles of electrophilic groups.
- a 1 : 1 molar ratio of nucleophilic to electrophilic groups is generally preferred.
- the first and second components are blended together to form a homogeneous dry powder.
- This powder is then combined with a buffer solution having a pH within the range of about 1.0 to 5.5 to form a homogeneous acidic aqueous solution, and this solution is then combined with a buffer solution having a pH within the range of about 6.0 to 1 1.0 to form a reactive solution.
- 0.375 grams of the dry powder can be combined with 0.75 grams of the acid buffer to provide, after mixing, a homogeneous solution, where this solution is combined with 1.1 grams of the basic buffer to provide a reactive mixture that substantially immediately forms a three-dimensional matrix.
- the buffer solutions are aqueous and can be any pharmaceutically acceptable basic or acid composition.
- the term "buffer” is used in a general sense to refer to an acidic or basic aqueous solution, where the solution may or may not be functioning to provide a buffering effect (i.e., resistance to change in pH upon addition of acid or base) in the compositions of the present invention.
- Acidic buffer solutions having a pH within the range of about 1.0 to 5.5 include by way of illustration and not limitation, solutions of: citric acid, hydrochloric acid, phosphoric acid, sulfuric acid, AMPSO (3-[(l,l-dimethyl-2-hydroxyethyl)amino]2-hydroxy-propane-sulfonic acid), acetic acid, lactic acid, and combinations thereof.
- the acidic buffer solution is a solution of citric acid, hydrochloric acid, phosphoric acid, sulfuric acid, and combinations thereof.
- the acidic buffer preferably has a pH such that it retards the reactivity of the nucleophilic groups on the first component.
- a pH of 2.1 is generally sufficient to retard the nucleophilicity of thiol groups.
- a lower pH is typically preferred when the first component contains amine groups as the nucleophilic groups.
- the acidic buffer is an acidic solution that, when contacted with nucleophilic groups that are present as part of the first component, renders those nucleophilic groups relatively non-nucleophilic.
- An exemplary acidic buffer is a solution of hydrochloric acid, having a concentration of about 6.3 mM and a pH in the range of 2.1 to 2.3. This buffer may be prepared by combining concentrated hydrochloric acid with water, i.e., by diluting concentrated hydrochloric acid with water.
- this buffer A may also be conveniently prepared by diluting 1.23 grams of concentrated hydrochloric acid to a volume of 2 liters, or diluting 1.84 grams of concentrated hydrochloric acid to a volume to 3 liters, or diluting 2.45 grams of concentrated hydrochloric acid to a volume of 4 liters, or diluting 3.07 grams concentrated hydrochloric acid to a volume of 5 liters, or diluting 3.68 grams of concentrated hydrochloric acid to a volume to 6 liters.
- the concentrated acid is preferably added to water.
- Basic buffer solutions having a pH within the range of about 6.0 to 11.0 include by way of illustration and not limitation, solutions of: glutamate, acetate, carbonate and carbonate salts (e.g., sodium carbonate, sodium carbonate monohydrate and sodium bicarbonate), borate, phosphate and phosphate salts (e.g., monobasic sodium phosphate monohydrate and dibasic sodium phosphate), and combinations thereof.
- the basic buffer solution is a solution of carbonate salts, phosphate salts, and combinations thereof.
- the basic buffer is an aqueous solution that neutralizes the effect of the acidic buffer, when it is added to the homogeneous solution of the first and second components and the acid buffer, so that the nucleophilic groups of the first component regain their nucleophilic character (that has been masked by the action of the acidic buffer), thus allowing the nucleophilic groups to inter- react with the electrophilic groups of the second component.
- An exemplary basic buffer is an aqueous solution of carbonate and phosphate salts.
- This buffer may be prepared by combining a base solution with a salt solution.
- the salt solution may be prepared by combining 34.7 g of monobasic sodium phosphate monohydrate, 49.3 g of sodium carbonate monohydrate, and sufficient water to provide a solution volume of 2 liter.
- a 6 liter solution may be prepared by combining 104.0 g of monobasic sodium phosphate monohydrate, 147.94 g of sodium carbonate monohydrate, and sufficient water to provide 6 liter of the salt solution.
- the basic buffer may be prepared by combining 7.2 g of sodium hydroxide with 180.0 g of water.
- the basic buffer is typically prepared by adding the base solution as needed to the salt solution, ultimately to provide a mixture having the desired pH, e.g., a pH of 9.65 to 9.75.
- the basic species present in the basic buffer should be sufficiently basic to neutralize the acidity provided by the acidic buffer, but should not be so nucleophilic itself that it will react substantially with the electrophilic groups of the second component. For this reason, relatively "soft" bases such as carbonate and phosphate are preferred in this embodiment of the invention.
- a first component e.g., a polyethyleneglycol core with four nucleophilic thiol groups, such as pentaerythritol tetrakis[mercaptoethyl poly(oxyethylene) ether] (“HS-PEG”) available from Aldrich Chemical Co.
- HS-PEG pentaerythritol tetrakis[mercaptoethyl poly(oxyethylene) ether]
- a second component e.g., a polyethyleneglycol core with four electrophilic N-hydroxysuccinimide groups, such as pentaerythritol tetrakis [l-(l '-oxo-5-succimidylpentanoate)-2-poly(oxyethylene) ether] ("NHS-PEG,” 10,000 MW, available from Aldrich Chemical Co.), with a first, acidic, buffer (e.g., an acid solution, e.g., a dilute hydrochloric acid solution) to form a homogeneous solution.
- a first, acidic, buffer e.g., an acid solution, e.g., a dilute hydrochloric acid solution
- This homogeneous solution is mixed with a second, basic, buffer (e.g., a basic solution, e.g., an aqueous solution containing phosphate and carbonate salts) whereupon the first and second components substantially immediately inter-react with one another to form a three-dimensional matrix.
- a basic solution e.g., an aqueous solution containing phosphate and carbonate salts
- Suitable delivery systems for the homogeneous dry powder composition and the two buffer solutions may involve a multi-compartment device, where one or more compartments contain the powder and one or more compartments contain the buffer solutions needed to provide for the aqueous environment, so that the composition is exposed to the aqueous environment as it leaves the compartment.
- a multi-compartment device where one or more compartments contain the powder and one or more compartments contain the buffer solutions needed to provide for the aqueous environment, so that the composition is exposed to the aqueous environment as it leaves the compartment.
- Many devices that are adapted for delivery of multi-component tissue sealants/hemostatic agents are well known in the art and can also be used in the practice of the present invention.
- the composition can be delivered using any type of controllable extrusion system, or it can be delivered manually in the form of a dry powder, and exposed to the aqueous environment at the site of administration.
- the homogeneous dry powder composition and the two buffer solutions may be conveniently formed under aseptic conditions by placing each of the three ingredients (dry powder, acidic buffer solution and basic buffer solution) into separate syringe barrels.
- the composition, first buffer solution and second buffer solution can be housed separately in a multiple- compartment syringe system having a multiple barrels, a mixing head, and an exit orifice.
- the first buffer solution can be added to the barrel housing the composition to dissolve the composition and form a homogeneous solution, which is then extruded into the mixing head.
- the second buffer solution can be simultaneously extruded into the mixing head.
- the resulting composition can then be extruded through the orifice onto a surface.
- the syringe barrels holding the dry powder and the basic buffer may be part of a dual-syringe system, e.g., a double barrel syringe as described in U.S. Patent 4,359,049 to Redl et al.
- the acid buffer can be added to the syringe barrel that also holds the dry powder, so as to produce the homogeneous solution.
- the acid buffer may be added (e.g., injected) into the syringe barrel holding the dry powder to thereby produce a homogeneous solution of the first and second components.
- This homogeneous solution can then be extruded into a mixing head, while the basic buffer is simultaneously extruded into the mixing head.
- the homogeneous solution and the basic buffer are mixed together to thereby form a reactive mixture.
- the reactive mixture is extruded through an orifice and onto a surface (e.g., tissue), where a film is formed, which can function as a sealant or a barrier, or the like.
- the reactive mixture begins forming a three-dimensional matrix immediately upon being formed by the mixing of the homogeneous solution and the basic buffer in the mixing head. Accordingly, the reactive mixture is preferably extruded from the mixing head onto the tissue very quickly after it is formed so that the three-dimensional matrix forms on, and is able to adhere to, the tissue.
- FIG. 1 As preferred embodiment of the multi-compartment syringe system of the present invention is shown in FIG. 1.
- the device is comprised of three syringes, two housing each of the two buffers of the present invention with the third syringe housing the dry powder composition 1.
- the two syringes housing the solutions 1 are pre-assembled into a syringe housing 2 with a transfer port closure 3 attached to the housing assembly 2 to allow mixing of the dry powder into the correct syringe.
- a syringe clip 4 is attached to the plunger rod of the syringe that does not require mixing with the dry powder composition.
- Other delivery systems for dispensing the multicomponent compositions of the invention may include pressurized delivery devices, examples of which are described in commonly owned co- pending U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 10/957,493, filed on October 1, 2004, andentitled "Mixing and Dispensing Fluid Components of a Multicomponent Composition.”
- a pressurized delivery device may include a diffuser surface having an outlet extending therethrough that is positioned downstream from a plurality of inlets. While at least one inlet is adapted to communicate with a source of a pressurized carrier fluid, each of a plurality of inlets is adapted to communicate with a source of a different fluid component.
- the dry powder solution is premixed with the first buffer to form a homogeneous solution as previously described and this solution is subsequently communicated with a first fluid component.
- the second fluid component will communicate with the second buffer solution previously described.
- a diffuser surface typically has a shape effective to direct and maintain each received fluid component in a different flow path on the diffuser surface toward the outlet for mixing therein and dispensing therethrough.
- the outlet may be aligned with any or all of the carrier fluid inlets that may be present in the nozzle to direct the pressurized carrier fluid in a manner that enhances fluid component mixing and to expel the mixture in a jet like manner.
- the diffuser surface may be permanently affixed or immobilized with respect to the inlets; however, when the diffuser surface is detachable from the inlets, the nozzle may be disassembled to facilitate cleaning and/or replacement of parts.
- the diffuser surface may be replaceable/and or disposable.
- the device may be constructed to allow assembly of the components in only configurations that align the diffuser surface to the inlets such that the performance of the device is optimized.
- FIGS. 2 and 3 illustrate an example of the pressurized delivery device of the present invention in the form of a nozzle that includes all of the above-discussed features which serve eliminate the problems associated with nozzle clogging.
- FIGS. 2 and 3 are not necessarily to scale, and certain dimensions may be exaggerated for clarity of presentation.
- the nozzle 1 includes a cap 10 having a slot-shaped outlet orifice 12 that extends through the center of the distal end 14 of the cap 10.
- the cap 10 is shown as having a cylindrical exterior surface 16 and an interior surface 18 that terminates at opening 20, but additional cap shapes are also suitable for use with the pressurized delivery device of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 3, the interior surface 18 of the cap 10 at end 14 serves to receive fluid components thereon.
- a generally elongate cylindrical connector 30 in the form of a unitary member having a first terminus 32 and a second terminus 34.
- the connector 30 is detached from the cap 10.
- Inlet lumens 36A and 36B each communicate at the second terminus 34 with a different source of a fluid component, e.g., the first buffer mixed with the dry powder in one source and the second buffer in the other source (not shown).
- inlet lumens 36C are provided fluid communication at the second terminus 34 with a source of pressurized carrier gas (not shown).
- the carrier fluid inlet lumens 36C define a plane that is perpendicular to a plane defined by the fluid component inlet lumens 36A and 36B.
- the first terminus 32 of the connector 30 has dimensions suitable for forming a fluid-tight seal against the interior surface 18 of the cap 10 at its proximal end 20.
- the cap 10 is placed over the first terminus 32 of the connector 30 such that the carrier fluid inlet lumens 36C are aligned with outlet orifice 12.
- each of a plurality of different fluid component sources is provided fluid communication with the fluid component inlet lumens 36A and 36B and at least one source of pressurized carrier gas is provided fluid communication with the carrier fluid inlet 36C.
- the interior surface 18 of the cap 10 at distal end 14 serves as a diffuser surface 18 that is adapted to receive fluid components thereon.
- the diffuser surface 18 exhibits two-fold axial symmetry.
- the dotted lines indicate the position of lumens 36A, 36B, and 36C relative to the diffuser surface 18.
- the dashed lines shown within the connector 30 indicate the separate flow paths of the fluid components emerging from the fluid component inlet lumens 36A and 36B, respectively, and directed by the diffuser surface 18 in a generally inward direction toward the center outlet orifice 12. Once the fluid components reach outlet orifice 12, pressurized gas from carrier fluid lumens 36C mix the fluid components and force the mixture out of the outlet orifice 12.
- the pressurized delivery device of the present invention the geometries of and spatial relationships between the various components of diffuser surface 18 represent an important aspect of the pressurized delivery device.
- the pressurized delivery device may be used to carry out mixing of a plurality of reactive components.
- nozzles for mixing reactive components are of the external mixing category because previously known internal mixing designs are prone to clogging. Clogging results when reactive components are mixed prior to introduction to the gas stream.
- the pressurized delivery device provides a high-pressure area between the inlets 36A-36C and the diffuser surface 18 that serves to mix reactive fluids while simultaneously forcing the mixture out of the orifice 12.
- the diffuser surface 18 is located downstream from the inlets 36A-36C and is effective to direct fluid components toward the outlet for mixing and dispensing therethrough by a pressurized carrier fluid; thus, the diffuser surface 18 should exhibit an appropriate shape to carry out its desired function while minimizing the odds of device clogging.
- the diffuser surface 18 depicted in FIGS. 2 and 3 is located within a cylindrical cap 10 having a flat exterior circular end surface and contains a centrally located slot-shaped orifice 12, such geometry is not required.
- the exterior surface of the cap is parallel to the diffuser surface.
- FIGS. 2 and 3 depict caps that exhibit axial symmetry, such axial symmetry is merely preferred and not required.
- the caps of the present invention are symmetrical, the symmetry may be axial or mirror symmetry. It is expected that variations on diffuser surface shapes and nozzle configurations may be developed through routine experimentation.
- the pressurized delivery device of the present invention generally requires a plurality of fluid component inlets for communication with an equal or less number of sources of fluid components.
- the pressurized delivery device typically provides a plurality of carrier fluid inlets.
- the carrier fluid inlets are provided communication with a single source of carrier fluid via a splitter or manifold, though a plurality of carrier fluid sources may be advantageously used as well in certain instances.
- inlets are typically each located at the terminus of a corresponding lumen.
- the lumens may coextend through an elongate cylindrical connector 30, as depicted in FIG. 2 (with 36A-36C depicting the lumens).
- the lumens may extend through separate tubes.
- tubes and/or tubing members may be constructed to form a lumen assembly.
- various lengths of multilumen delivery tubing for use in specific surgical or non-surgical applications. Particularly in laparoscopic applications, it may be useful to employ flexible tubing.
- the tubing serves to maintain separation of the two fluid components and provide a pathway for the delivery of pressurized gas to the diffuser surface.
- Additional features serve to enhance the mixing and delivery performance of the pressurized delivery device of the present invention.
- two or more fluid components may be individually delivered through inlets to impinge upon the diffuser surface.
- the components first impinge upon the diffuser plate near the outlet to reduce the residence time of the components in the device.
- Any of a number of means may be used to provide motive force to introduce fluid components through the inlets and toward the outlet.
- Exemplary motive force means include pumps, compressors, pistons, and the like.
- the diffuser plate directs the components toward the outlet 12, and the pressurized carrier fluid simultaneously provides a force to mix and expel the components through the outlet.
- one or more the carrier fluid inlets are positioned such that a high-pressure zone is created between the component inlets and the diffuser surface while a comparatively low-pressure zone is created downstream from the outlet. "Dead space" that serve to trap residue is generally avoided. As a result, a fluid mixture is forced through the outlet in a jet-like fashion, thereby reducing any potential or actual buildup of residue that serve to clog the pressurized delivery device.
- any of a number of carrier fluids may be employed with the pressurized delivery device of the present invention.
- the carrier fluid may be gaseous and/or liquid in nature.
- the carrier fluid is chemically inert with respect to the fluid components.
- Suitable inert gases include, without limitation, air, carbon dioxide, nitrogen, argon, helium, gaseous perfluorinated alkanes and ethers, gaseous chlorofluorocarbons and the like.
- Suitable inert liquids include, without limitation, polysiloxanes, perfluroinated polyethers, and the like.
- Pressurized air represents an economical and practical carrier fluid for use with the pressurized delivery device.
- Equipment associated with pressurized air is well known in the art and may include pressurized tanks or cylinders as well as compressors.
- one or more check valves may be provided to prevent back flow of fluid component resulting from pressure buildup associated with the use of the pressurized delivery device.
- Such check valves may be positioned upstream from the diffuser surface, e.g., within lumens associated with the inlets.
- Such check valves are particularly useful when inlet lumens are short, e.g., about 2 to about 5 centimeters in length, because the potential for back flow tends to be inversely proportional to the length of the lumens; however, check valves may be employed with longer lumens as well.
- portions of the device that contact multicomponent composition and the fluid components thereof should be inert and preferably repellant to the materials contacted.
- portions of the device that contact the fluids in operation should be selected according to the fluids themselves.
- the device or components thereof may be made from a plastic such as polycarbonates, polyurethane, polyesters, acrylics, ABS polymers, polysulfone, and the like. Adhesion inhibiting coatings such as polysiloxanes, perfluorinated polymers, and the like may be used as well.
- the diffuser surface is typically inert and optionally repelling to the fluid components.
- Similar, lumen surfaces that may contact the fluid components or the carrier fluid are typically inert and optionally repelling to the corresponding fluid as well.
- the pressurized delivery device of the present invention is particularly useful for dispensing multicomponent compositions. While some gaseous components may be used, the pressurized delivery device is particularly useful for liquids. Thus, at least one fluid component is usually a liquid. Often, each fluid component includes a liquid. For example, the pressurized delivery device is useful to dispense composition such as fluid mixtures, wherein the mixing of a plurality of fluids results in an increase in viscosity sufficient to impair mixture flow. Such compositions may be formed from fluid components that are chemically reactive with respect to each other. In some instances, a crosslinking agent may be provided.
- a diffuser surface having an outlet extending therethrough such that the diffuser surface is downstream from a plurality of fluid component inlets and at least one carrier fluid inlet.
- a different fluid component is directed from each of the fluid component inlets toward the diffuser surface.
- fluid components are directed at substantially the same flow rate toward the diffuser surface.
- the fluid components are directed at different flow rates toward the diffuser surface.
- the flow rate of the carrier fluid is higher than that for the fluid components.
- the diffuser surface maintains and directs each received fluid component in a different flow path toward the outlet. Pressurized carrier fluid from the at least one carrier fluid inlet is also directed through the outlet, thereby mixing the fluid components present at the outlet and dispensing the composition through the outlet.
- compositions of the invention can also be packaged in kits and used in a variety of medical applications.
- the kit would include buffer solutions, as well as written or otherwise illustrated instructions for use.
- a typical kit for use in medical applications comprises: (a)a homogeneous dry powder composition comprised of: (i) a first component having a core substituted with m nucleophilic groups, where m>2; and (ii) a second component having a core substituted with n electrophilic groups, where n>2 and m+n>4; wherein the nucleophilic and electrophilic groups are non-reactive in a dry environment but are rendered reactive upon exposure to an aqueous environment such that the components inter-react in the aqueous environment to form a three-dimensional matrix; (b) a first buffer solution having a pH within the range of about 1.0 to 5.5; and (c) a second buffer solution having a pH within the range of about 6.0 to 1 1.0; wherein each component is packaged separately and admixed immediately
- the kit can further comprise a delivery system that will allow the composition to be delivered as a spray.
- the spray can be generated by manually mixing the components and passing them through a spray nozzle.
- the spray generation can also be accomplished by using a flow of gas (for example, air, nitrogen, carbon dioxide).
- Kits contemplated under the present invention will preferably include a delivery system for the compositions of the present invention.
- Delivery devices that may be included in the kits will preferably be one of the multi-component syringe device and/or the pressurized delivery devices described herein.
- a multi-component syringe device is included in the kit.
- the multi-component spray device may be a multiple-compartment syringe system having multiple barrels, a mixing head, and an exit orifice, wherein the dry powder composition, the first buffer, and the second buffer are housed separately in the multiple-compartment syringe system.
- FIG. 1 describes a preferred embodiment of the multi-compartment device.
- the device When provided in a kit, the device is provided with three pouches.
- the first pouch is a liquid components pouch, which consists of two syringes that are preassembled into a housing.
- a transfer port closure is attached to the housing assembly to allow mixing of the dry powders into the correct syringe.
- a clip is attached to the plunger rod of the syringe that does not require mixing with the dry powders.
- the second pouch is a powder component pouch, which consists of a syringe containing the dry powder(s) and a dessicant package.
- the third pouch is an applicator pouch, which contains two applicators.
- each pouch is opened using aseptic techniques and the contents of each pouch are transferred into a sterile field.
- the liquid and powder components are prepared as follows. Without removing the syringe clip, the luer cap on the transfer port closure is removed. The cap is removed from the powder syringe and the powder syringe is connected to the opening of the transfer port closure. The liquid is transferred into the powder by forcefully depressing the plunger. The contents between the two syringes are mixed back and forth between the two syringes until the solid is completely dissolved (e.g., 18-20 times). The entire content is then pushed into the syrnting contained in the syringe housing.
- the powder syringe is disengaged by detaching the transfer port closure by grasping the powder syringe barrel; pressing the levers on the syringe housing; and pulling both the empty powder syringe and transfer port closure from the housing.
- the syringe tips are held up, the syringe plungers are leveled, the syringe clip is rotated to connect to the other plunger; and holding the syringe upright, all air is expelled from the syringe.
- the applicator is snapped onto the end of the syringe housing making the composition ready to use.
- a clear gel should be seen approximately three minutes following the mixing of the components.
- a pressurized delivery device is included in the kit.
- the pressurized delivery device of the present invention includes a plurality of fluid component inlets each adapted to communicate with a source of different fluid components; at least one carrier fluid inlet adapted to communicate with a source of a pressurized carrier fluid; a diffuser surface located downstream from the plurality of fluid component inlets and the at least one carrier fluid inlet; and an outlet extending through the diffuser surface, wherein the diffuser surface is adapted to receive fluid components thereon and has a shape effective to direct and maintain each received fluid component in a different flow path toward the outlet for mixing and dispensing therethrough by the pressurized carrier fluid from the at least one carrier fluid inlet.
- Kits contemplated under the present invention are not limited to the devices described herein and may also include any other suitable delivery device known in the art of drug delivery.
- Exemplary medical applications involve, by way of illustration and not limitation, adhering or sealing biological tissue, delivering a biologically active agent (in which case, the kit would further comprise a biologically active agent, for example, mixed with the components to form a homogeneous mixture or packaged separately), delivering cells and genes (in which case, the kit would further comprise the living cells or genes, for example, mixed with the components to form a homogeneous mixture or packaged separately), bioadhesion, in ophthalmic applications, for tissue augmentation, for adhesion prevention, forming synthetic implants and coating synthetic implants, and for the treatment of aneurysms.
- the mixture of the biologically active agents with the components is a homogeneous mixture; however, this feature is not required. Whether packaged together or separately, each of the components and the biological agent should be in sterile packages prior to use
- the applicator tip should be wiped with gauze and the device should be set upright to prevent clogging. If the composition does not gel within 30 seconds, i.e., the composition remains watery on the site, the site should be flushed with saline and the material aspirated. If the treated site fails to seal, the surface should be blotted dry; reclamping the vessel may be required to dry the field for reapplication of the composition. If the applicator becomes clogged, it should be replaced with a new applicator. VI. USES
- compositions of the present invention can be used in a variety of different applications.
- the compositions can be adapted for use in any tissue engineering application where synthetic gel matrices are currently being utilized.
- the compositions are useful as tissue sealants, vascular sealants, in tissue augmentation, in tissue repair, as hemostatic agents, in preventing tissue adhesions, in providing surface modifications, and in drug/cell/gene delivery applications and may be used in a variety of open, endocopic, and laparoscopic surgical procedures.
- tissue sealants tissue sealants
- vascular sealants in tissue augmentation
- tissue repair as hemostatic agents
- tissue adhesions in providing surface modifications
- drug/cell/gene delivery applications may be used in a variety of open, endocopic, and laparoscopic surgical procedures.
- One of skill in the art can easily determine the appropriate administration protocol to use with any particular composition having a known gel strength and gelation time. A more detailed description of several specific applications is given below.
- the compositions described herein can be used for medical conditions that require a coating or sealing layer to prevent the leakage of gases, liquid or solids.
- the method entails applying the composition to the damaged tissue or organ to seal 1) vascular and or other tissues or organs to stop or minimize the flow of blood; 2) thoracic tissue to stop or minimize the leakage of air; 3) gastrointestinal tract or pancreatic tissue to stop or minimize the leakage of fecal or tissue contents; 4) bladder or urethra to stop or minimize the leakage of urine; 5) dura to stop or minimize the leakage of CSF; and 6) skin or serosal tissue to stop the leakage of serosal fluid.
- compositions may also be used to adhere tissues together such as small vessels, nerves or dermal tissue.
- the compositions can be used 1) by applying them to the surface of one tissue and then a second tissue may be rapidly pressed against the first tissue or 2) by bringing the tissues in close juxtaposition and then applying the compositions.
- the compositions can be used to fill spaces in soft and hard tissues that are created by disease or surgery.
- one embodiment of the invention is a method of sealing tissue of a patient comprising the steps of: (a) providing a composition of the invention; (b) rendering the nucleophilic and electrophilic groups reactive by exposing the composition to an aqueous environment to effect inter-reaction; wherein said exposure comprises: (i) dissolving the composition in a first buffer solution having a pH within the range of about 1.0 to 5.5 to form a homogeneous solution, and (ii) adding a second buffer solution having a pH within the range of about 6.0 to 11.0 to the homogeneous solution to form a mixture; and (c) placing the mixture into contact with tissue and allowing a three- dimensional matrix to form and seal the tissue.
- the compositions can be applied in conjunction with an implanted medical device such that it prevents the leakage of gases, liquids or solids from the device or from the device-tissue interface.
- the composition of the invention can be applied to this area to prevent further blood leakage.
- the composition may be further combined with a fibrosing agent to further enhance the properties of the sealant or adhesive.
- a fibrosing agent i.e., scarring
- a polymeric sealant spray which solidifies into a film or coating to promote fibrosis and seal air leaks.
- a fibrosing agent may be included with the polymer composition for use as a pulmonary sealant during open or endoscopic lung reduction surgeries, for example, to seal off pulmonary bullae in open and endoscopic lung destruction procedures.
- a fibrosis-inducing agent to a pulmonary sealant can induce the formation of a stable, fibrous scar that permanently seals the parietal surface of the lung at the surgical location (or the alveolar surface of the lung if delivered endoscopically during lung reduction surgery), reduces hospitalization time and prevents recurrence of the air leak.
- a fibrosis-inducing pulmonary sealant can be useful to improve the outcomes in open lung surgery, endoscopic lung reduction surgery for emphysema (severe COPD), esophageal leaks after endoscopy or resection, complications of treatment of other intra-thoracic malignancies, pleural effusion, haemothorax, pneumothorax, chylothorax, complications of aspiration, and tuberculosis.
- fibrosing agents for use in sealants and adhesive include talc, silk, wool, chitosan, polylysine, fibronectin, bleomycin, and connective tissue growth factor (CTGF), as well as analogues and derivatives of the aforementioned.
- CTGF connective tissue growth factor
- Drug dose can be calculated as a function of dose per unit area (of the amount of the sealant being applied), total drug dose administered can be measured and appropriate surface concentrations of active drug can be determined. Regardless of the method of incorporation of the drug into the sealant or adhesive, the exemplary fibrosing agents, used alone or in combination, should be administered under the following dosing guidelines :
- the total dose of talc delivered from a sealant, or coated onto the surface of a lung should not exceed 100 mg (range of 1 ⁇ g to 100 mg). In one embodiment, the total amount of talc released from the sealant should be in the range of 10 ⁇ g to 50 mg.
- the dose per unit area i.e., the dosage of talc as a function of the surface area of the lung to which drug is applied
- talc should be applied to a lung surface at a dose of 0.05 ⁇ g/mm 2 -10 ⁇ g/mm 2 of surface area coated.
- the total dose of silk delivered from a pulmonary sealant, or coated onto the surface of a lung should not exceed 100 mg (range of 1 ⁇ g to 100 mg). In one embodiment, the total amount of silk released from the sealant should be in the range of 10 ⁇ g to 50 mg.
- the dose per unit area i.e., the dosage of silk as a function of the surface area of the lung to which drug is applied
- silk should be applied to a lung surface at a dose of 0.05 ⁇ g/mm 2 -10 ⁇ g/mm 2 of surface area coated.
- the above dosing parameters should be utilized in combination with the release rate of the drug from the sealant such that a minimum concentration of 0.01 nM to 1000 ⁇ M of silk is delivered to the tissue.
- the total dose of chitosan delivered from a pulmonary sealant, or coated onto the surface of a lung should not exceed 100 mg (range of 1 ⁇ g to 100 mg). In one embodiment, the total amount of chitosan released from the sealant should be in the range of 10 ⁇ g to 50 mg.
- the dose per unit area i.e., the dosage of chitosan as a function of the surface area of the lung to which drug is applied
- chitosan should be applied to a lung surface at a dose of 0.05 ⁇ g/mm 2 -10 ⁇ g/mm 2 of surface area coated.
- specific (polymeric and non-polymeric) drug delivery vehicles and specific pulmonary sealants can release chitosan at differing rates
- the above dosing parameters should be utilized in combination with the release rate of the drug from the sealant such that a minimum concentration of 0.01 nM to 1000 ⁇ M of chitosan is delivered to the tissue.
- the total dose of polylysine delivered from a pulmonary sealant, or coated onto the surface of a lung should not exceed 100 mg (range of 1 ⁇ g to 100 mg). In one embodiment, the total amount of polylysine released from the sealant should be in the range of 10 ⁇ g to 50 mg.
- the dose per unit area i.e., the dosage of polylysine as a function of the surface area of the lung to which drug is applied
- polylysine should be applied to a lung surface at a dose of 0.05 ⁇ g/mm 2 -10 ⁇ g/mm 2 of surface area coated.
- specific (polymeric and non-polymeric) drug delivery vehicles and specific pulmonary sealants can release polylysine at differing rates, the above dosing parameters should be utilized in combination with the release rate of the drug from the pulmonary sealant such that a minimum concentration of 0.01 nM to 1000 ⁇ M of polylysine is delivered to the tissue.
- the total dose of fibronectin delivered from a pulmonary sealant, or coated onto the surface of a lung should not exceed 100 mg (range of 1 ⁇ g to 100 mg). In one embodiment, the total amount of fibronectin released from the sealant should be in the range of 10 ⁇ g to 50 mg.
- the dose per unit area i.e., the dosage of fibronectin as a function of the surface area of the lung to which drug is applied
- fibronectin should be applied to a lung surface at a dose of 0.05 ⁇ g/mm 2 -10 ⁇ g/mm 2 of surface area coated.
- specific (polymeric and non-polymeric) drug delivery vehicles and specific pulmonary sealants can release fibronectin at differing rates, the above dosing parameters should be utilized in combination with the release rate of the drug from the sealant such that a minimum concentration of 0.01 nM to 1000 ⁇ M of fibronectin is delivered to the tissue.
- the total dose of bleomycin delivered from a pulmonary sealant, or coated onto the surface of a lung should not exceed 100 mg (range of 0.01 ⁇ g to 100 mg). In one embodiment, the total amount of bleomycin released from the sealant should be in the range of 0.010 ⁇ g to 50 mg.
- the dose per unit area i.e., the dosage of bleomycin as a function of the surface area of the lung to which drug is applied
- bleomycin should be applied to a lung surface at a dose of 0.005 ⁇ g/mm 2 -10 ⁇ g/mm 2 of surface area coated.
- specific (polymeric and non-polymeric) drug delivery vehicles and specific pulmonary sealants can release bleomycin at differing rates, the above dosing parameters should be utilized in combination with the release rate of the drug from the sealant such that a minimum concentration of 0.001 nM to 1000 ⁇ M of bleomycin is delivered to the tissue.
- the total dose of CTGF delivered from a pulmonary sealant, or coated onto the surface of a lung should not exceed 100 mg (range of 0.01 ⁇ g to 100 mg). In one embodiment, the total amount of CTGF released from the sealant should be in the range of 0.10 ⁇ g to 50 mg.
- the dose per unit area i.e., the dosage of CTGF as a function of the surface area of the lung to which drug is applied
- CTGF should be applied to a lung surface at a dose of 0.005 ⁇ g/mm 2 -10 ⁇ g/mm 2 of surface area coated.
- specific (polymeric and non- polymeric) drug delivery vehicles and specific pulmonary sealants can release CTGF at differing rates, the above dosing parameters should be utilized in combination with the release rate of the drug from the sealant such that a minimum concentration of 0.001 nM to 1000 ⁇ M of CTGF is delivered to the tissue.
- the fibrosing agent e.g., talc, silk, chitosan, polylysine, fibronectin, bleomycin, CTGF
- the fibrosing agent may be released from the pulmonary sealant such that fibrosis in the tissue is promoted for a period ranging from several hours to several months.
- the fibrosing agent may be released in effective concentrations for a period ranging from 1 hour- 30 days.
- analogues and derivatives of the fibrosing agent e.g., analogues and derivatives of talc, silk, chitosan, polylysine, fibronectin, bleomycin, CTGF, as previously described
- the above dosing parameters are then adjusted according to the relative potency of the analogue or derivative as compared to the parent compound (e.g., a compound twice as potent as the agent is administered at half the above parameters, a compound half as potent as the agent is administered at twice the above parameters, etc.).
- the sealant may alone or additionally comprise an inflammatory cytokine (e.g., TGF ⁇ , PDGF, VEGF, bFGF, TNF ⁇ , NGF, GM-CSF, IGF-a, IL-I, IL- 1- ⁇ , IL-8, IL-6, and growth hormone) or an analogue or derivative thereof.
- Inflammatory cytokines are to be used in formulations at concentrations that range from 0.0001 ⁇ g/ml to approximately 20 mg/ml depending on the specific clinical application, formulation type (e.g., gel, liquid, solid, semi-solid), formulation chemistry, duration of required application, type of medical device interface and formulation volume and or surface area coverage required.
- the inflammatory cytokine is released in effective concentrations for a period ranging from 1 - 180 days.
- the total dose for a single application is typically not to exceed 500 mg (range of 0.0001 ⁇ g to 100 mg); preferred 0.001 ⁇ g to 50 mg.
- the dose is per unit area of 0.0001 ⁇ g - 500 ⁇ g per mm 2 ; with a preferred dose of 0.001 ⁇ g/mm 2 - 200 ⁇ g/mm 2 .
- Minimum concentration of 10 10 - 10 "4 g/ml of inflammatory cytokine is to be maintained on the device surface.
- the sealant may alone or additionally comprise an agent that stimulates cellular proliferation.
- agents include: dexamethasone, isotretinoin (13-cis retinoic acid), 17- ⁇ - estradiol, estradiol, l- ⁇ -25 dihydroxyvitamin D 3> diethylstibesterol, cyclosporine A, L-NAME, all- trans retinoic acid (ATRA), and analogues and derivatives thereof. Doses used are those concentrations which are demonstrated to stimulate cell proliferation.
- the proliferative agents are to be used in formulations at concentrations that range from 0.0000001 to 25 mg/ml depending on the specific clinical application, formulation type (e.g., gel, liquid, solid, semi-solid), formulation chemistry, duration of required application, type of medical device interface and formulation volume and or surface area coverage required.
- formulation type e.g., gel, liquid, solid, semi-solid
- formulation chemistry e.g., duration of required application
- type of medical device interface e.g., aqueous chemistry
- duration of required application e.g., duration of required application
- type of medical device interface e.g., a medical device interface
- formulation volume and or surface area coverage required e.g., duration of required application
- the proliferative agent is released in effective concentrations for a period ranging from 1 - 180 days.
- the total dose for a single application is typically not to exceed 500 mg (range of 0.0001 ⁇ g to 200 mg); preferred 0.001 ⁇ g to 100 mg.
- the dose is per unit area of 0.00001 ⁇ g - 500 ⁇ g per mm 2 ; with a preferred dose of 0.0001 ⁇ g/mm 2 - 200 ⁇ g/mm 2 .
- Minimum concentration of 10 " " - 10 '6 M of proliferative agent is to be maintained on the device surface.
- compositions may also be used for localized delivery of various drugs and other biologically active agents.
- the biologically active agent can either be admixed with the compositions of the invention or be chemically coupled to one of the individual components in the composition, e.g., by attachment to one of the reactive groups.
- processes for covalently binding biologically active agents such as growth factors using functionally activated polyethylene glycols are described in U.S. Patent No. 5,162,430 to Rhee et al.
- Such compositions preferably include linkages that can be easily biodegraded, for example as a result of enzymatic degradation, resulting in the release of the active agent into the target tissue, where it will exert its desired therapeutic effect.
- the biologically active agent may be incorporated with a polymeric or non-polymeric carrier to facilitate the incorporation of the agent into the composition.
- the carrier may facilitate sustained release of the agent from the composition over a prolonged period of time (e.g., over the course of several days, weeks, or months).
- localized delivery as well as localized sustained delivery of the agent may be desired.
- a therapeutic agent may be admixed with, blended with, conjugated to, or, otherwise modified to contain a polymeric composition (which may be either biodegradable or non-biodegradable) or non- polymeric composition in order to release the therapeutic agent over a period of time.
- biodegradable polymers suitable for the delivery of therapeutic agents include albumin, collagen, gelatin, hyaluronic acid, starch, cellulose and cellulose derivatives (e.g., regenerated cellulose, methylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, carboxymethylcellulose, cellulose acetate phthalate, cellulose acetate succinate, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose phthalate), casein, dextrans, polysaccharides, fibrinogen, poly(ether ester) multiblock copolymers, based on poly(ethylene glycol) and poly(butylene terephthalate), tyrosine-derived polycarbonates (e.g., U.S. Patent No.
- non-degradable polymers suitable for the delivery of therapeutic agents include poly(ethylene-co-vinyl acetate) ("EVA") copolymers, aromatic polyesters, such as poly(ethylene terephthalate), silicone rubber, acrylic polymers (polyacrylate, polyacrylic acid, polymethylacrylic acid, polymethylmethacrylate, poly(butyl methacrylate)), poly(alkylcynoacrylate) (e.g., poly(ethylcyanoacrylate), poly(butylcyanoacrylate) poly(hexylcyanoacrylate) poly(octylcyanoacrylate)), acrylic resin, polyethylene, polypropylene, polyamides (nylon 6,6), polyurethanes (e.g., CHRONOFLEX AL and CHRONOFLEX AR (both from CardioTech International, Inc., Woburn, MA), TECOFLEX, and BIONATE (Polymer Technology Group, Inc., Emeryville, CA)),, poly(esters, poly(ester
- Polymers may also be developed which are either anionic ⁇ e.g., alginate, carrageenan, carboxymethyl cellulose, poly(acrylamido-2-methyl propane sulfonic acid) and copolymers thereof, poly(methacrylic acid and copolymers thereof and poly(acrylic acid) and copolymers thereof, as well as blends thereof, or cationic (e.g., chitosan, poly-L-lysine, polyethylenimine, and poly(allyl amine)) and blends thereof (see generally, Dunn et al., J. Applied Polymer Sci. 50:353-365, 1993; Cascone et al., J.
- anionic e.g., alginate, carrageenan, carboxymethyl cellulose, poly(acrylamido-2-methyl propane sulfonic acid) and copolymers thereof, poly(methacrylic acid and copolymers thereof and poly(acrylic acid) and copolymers thereof, as well
- Other representative polymers capable of sustained localized delivery of therapeutic agents described herein include carboxylic polymers, polyacetates, polycarbonates, polyethers, polyethylenes, polyvinylbutyrals, polysilanes, polyureas, polyoxides, polystyrenes, polysulfides, polysulfones, polysulfonides, polyvinylhalides, pyrrolidones, rubbers, thermal-setting polymers, cross-linkable acrylic and methacrylic polymers, ethylene acrylic acid copolymers, styrene acrylic copolymers, vinyl acetate polymers and copolymers, vinyl acetal polymers and copolymers, epoxies, melamines, other amino resins, phenolic polymers, and copolymers thereof, water-insoluble cellulose ester polymers (including cellulose acetate propionate, cellulose acetate, cellulose acetate butyrate, cellulose nitrate, cellulose a
- polymers as described herein can also be blended or copolymerized in various compositions as required to deliver therapeutic doses of biologically active agents.
- Drug delivery vehicles may take a variety of forms.
- the carrier may be in the form of microspheres (e.g., PLGA, PLLA, PDLLA, PCL, gelatin, polydioxanone, poly(alkylcyanoacrylate)), nanospheres (PLGA, PLLA, PDLLA, PCL, gelatin, polydioxanone, poly(alkylcyanoacrylate)) (see, e.g., Hagan et al., Proc. Intern. Symp. Control ReI. Bioact. Mater. 22, 1995; Kwon et al., Pharm Res. 72(2):192-195; Kwon et al., Pharm Res.
- microspheres e.g., PLGA, PLLA, PDLLA, PCL, gelatin, polydioxanone, poly(alkylcyanoacrylate)
- microemulsions, micelles SDS, block copolymers of the form X-Y, Y-X-Y, R-(Y-X) n , R-(X-Y) n and X-Y-X (where X in a polyalkylene oxide (e.g., poly(ethylene glycol, poly(propylene glycol) and block copolymers of poly(ethylene oxide) and poly(propylene oxide) (e.g., PLURONIC and PLURONIC R series of polymers from BASF Corporation, Mount Olive, NJ) and Y is a biodegradable polyester, where the polyester may comprise the residues of one or more of the monomers selected from lactide, lactic acid, glycolide, glycolic acid, e-caprolactone, gamma- caprolactone, hydroxyvaleric acid, hydroxybutyric acid, beta-butyrolactone, gamma-butyrolactone, gamma-valerol
- cyclodextrins such as hydroxypropyl cyclodextrin (Cserhati and Hollo, Int. J. Pharm. 108:69-75, 1994), liposomes (see, e.g., Sharma et al., Cancer Res. 53:5877-5881, 1993; Sharma and Straubinger, Pharm. Res. 7/(60):889-896, 1994; WO 93/18751; U.S. Patent No. 5,242,073), liposome/gel (WO 94/26254), nanocapsules (Bartoli et al., J.
- cyclodextrins such as hydroxypropyl cyclodextrin (Cserhati and Hollo, Int. J. Pharm. 108:69-75, 1994)
- liposomes see, e.g., Sharma et al., Cancer Res. 53:5877-5881, 1993; Sharma and Straubinger, Pharm. Res.
- therapeutic agents may be fashioned in the form of microspheres, microparticles and/or nanoparticles having any size ranging from 50 nm to 500 ⁇ m, depending upon the particular use.
- These compositions can be formed by spray-drying methods, milling methods, coacervation methods, W/O emulsion methods, W/O/W emulsion methods, and solvent evaporation methods.
- these compositions can include microemulsions, emulsions, liposomes and micelles.
- compositions comprising a drug loaded carrier may also be readily applied as a "spray", which solidifies into a film or coating for use as a device/implant surface coating or to line the tissues of the implantation site.
- sprays may be prepared from microspheres of a wide array of sizes, including for example, from 0.1 ⁇ m to 3 ⁇ m, from 10 ⁇ m to 30 ⁇ m, and from 30 ⁇ m to 100 ⁇ m.
- biologically active agents such as growth factors or fibrosis-inducing agents may be delivered from the composition to a local tissue site in order to facilitate scar formation, tissue healing, and/or regeneration.
- a method is provided for delivering a biologically active agent, where the composition also includes the biologically active agent (e.g., a fibrosing agent) to be delivered, and steps (a) and (b) are as described for the method of sealing tissue. Step (c) would involve allowing a three-dimensional matrix to form and delivering the biologically active agent.
- the composition may include an agent that promotes fibrosis.
- compositions that include a fibrosis-inducing agent may be used in a variety of applications, including, without limitation, tissue augmentation, bone growth, treatment of aneurysms, filling and blocking of voids in the body, medical devices coatings, and for use in sealant compositions.
- the fibrosis or adhesion-inducing agent is silk.
- Silk refers to a fibrous protein, and may be obtained from a number of sources, typically spiders and silkworms. Typical silks contain about 75% of actual fiber, referred to as fibroin, and about 35% sericin, which is a gummy protein that holds the filaments together.
- Silk filaments are generally very fine and long - as much as 300-900 meters long.
- a commercially available silk protein is available from Croda, Inc., of Parsippany, N. J., and is sold under the trade names CROSILK LIQUID (silk amino acids), CROSILK 10,000 (hydrolyzed silk), CROSILK POWDER (powdered silk), and CROSILKQUAT (cocodiammonium hydroxypropyl silk amino acid).
- CROSILK LIQUID sik amino acids
- CROSILK 10,000 hydrolyzed silk
- CROSILK POWDER powdered silk
- CROSILKQUAT cocodiammonium hydroxypropyl silk amino acid
- SERICIN available from Pentapharm, LTD, a division of Kordia, BV, of the Netherlands. Further details of such silk protein mixtures can be found in U.S. Patent. No. 4,906,460, to Kim, et al., assigned to Sorenco.
- Silk useful in the present invention includes natural (raw) silk, hydrolyzed silk, and modified silk, i.e., silk that has undergone a chemical, mechanical, or vapor treatment, e.g., acid treatment or acylation (see, e.g., U.S. Patent No. 5,747,015).
- a chemical, mechanical, or vapor treatment e.g., acid treatment or acylation
- Raw silk is typically twisted into a strand sufficiently strong for weaving or knitting.
- Four different types of silk thread may be produced by this procedure: organzine, crepe, tram and thrown singles.
- Organzine is a thread made by giving the raw silk a preliminary twist in one direction and then twisting two of these threads together in the opposite direction.
- Crepe is similar to organzine but is twisted to a much greater extent. Twisting in only one direction two or more raw silk threads makes tram. Thrown singles are individual raw silk threads that are twisted in only one direction. Any of these types of silk threads may be used in the present invention.
- the silk used in the present invention may be in any suitable form that allows the silk to be joined with the medical implant, e.g., the silk may be in thread or powder-based forms.
- the silk can be prepared in the powdered form by several different methods. For example the silk can be milled (e.g., cryomill) into a powdered form. Alternatively the silk can be dissolved in a suitable solvent (e.g., HFIP or 9M LiBr) and then sprayed (electrospray, spray dry) or added to a non-solvent to produce a powder.
- a suitable solvent e.g., HFIP or 9M LiBr
- the silk may have any molecular weight, where various molecular weights are typically obtained by the hydrolysis of natural silk, where the extent and harshness of the hydrolysis conditions determines the product molecular weight.
- the silk may have an average (number or weight) molecular weight of about 200 to 5,000. See, e.g., JP-B-59-29199 (examined Japanese patent publication) for a description of conditions that may be used to hydrolyze silk.
- fibrosis and adhesion-inducing agents include irritants (e.g., talc, talcum powder, copper, metallic beryllium (or its oxides), wool ⁇ e.g., animal wool, wood wool, and synthetic wool), quartz dust, silica, crystalline silicates), polymers (e.g., polylysine, polyurethanes, poly(ethylene terephthalate), polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), poly(alkylcyanoacrylates), and poly(ethylene-co-vinylacetate)); vinyl chloride and polymers of vinyl chloride; peptides with high lysine content; growth factors and inflammatory cytokines involved in angiogenesis, fibroblast migration, fibroblast proliferation, ECM synthesis and tissue remodeling, such as epidermal growth factor (EGF) family, transforming growth factor- ⁇ (TGF- ⁇ ), transforming growth factor- ⁇ (TGF- ⁇ -1, TGF- ⁇ -2, TGF- ⁇ -3), plate
- CTGF connective tissue growth factor
- inflammatory microcrystals e.g., crystalline minerals such as crystalline silicates
- bromocriptine methylsergide, methotrexate, chitosan, N-carboxybutyl chitosan, carbon tetrachloride, thioacetamide, fibrosin, ethanol, bleomycin, naturally occurring or synthetic peptides containing the Arg-Gly-Asp (RGD) sequence, generally at one or both termini (see e.g., U.S. Patent No. 5,997,895), and tissue adhesives, such as cyanoacrylate and crosslinked poly(ethylene glycol) - methylated collagen compositions, such as described below.
- tissue adhesives such as cyanoacrylate and crosslinked poly(ethylene glycol) - methylated collagen compositions, such as described below.
- fibrosis-inducing agents include agents that promote bone growth, such as for example bone morphogenic proteins.
- bone morphogenic proteins include the following: BMP-2, BMP-3, BMP-4, BMP-5, BMP-6 (Vgr-1), BMP-7 (OP-I), BMP-8, BMP-9, BMP- 10, BMP-11, BMP-12, BMP-13, BMP-14, BMP-15, and BMP-16. Of these, BMP-2, BMP-3, BMP- 4, BMP-5, BMP-6, and BMP-7.
- Bone morphogenic proteins are described, for example, in U.S. Patent Nos.
- fibrosis-inducing agents include components of extracellular matrix (e.g., fibronectin, fibrin, fibrinogen, collagen (e.g., bovine collagen), fibrillar and non-fibrillar collagen, adhesive glycoproteins, proteoglycans (e.g., heparin sulfate, chondroitin sulfate, dermatan sulfate), hyaluronan, secreted protein acidic and rich in cysteine (SPARC), thrombospondins, tenacin, and cell adhesion molecules (including integrins, vitronectin, fibronectin, laminin, hyaluronic acid, elastin, bitronectin), proteins found in basement membranes, and fibrosin) and inhibitors of matrix metalloproteinases, such as TIMPs (tissue inhibitors of matrix metalloproteinases) and synthetic TIMPs, e.g., marimistat,
- a composition incorporates a compound which acts to stimulate cellular proliferation.
- a composition may incorporate a compound which acts to stimulate cellular proliferation in addition to a fibrosing agent.
- agents that stimulate cellular proliferation include, pyruvic acid, naltrexone, leptin, D-glucose, insulin, amlodipine, alginate oligosaccharides, minoxidil, dexamethasone, isotretinoin (13-cis retinoic acid), 17- ⁇ -estradiol, estradiol, l- ⁇ -25 dihydroxyvitamin D 3 diethylstibesterol, cyclosporine A, L-NAME (L-NG-nitroarginine methyl ester (hydrochloride)), all-trans retinoic acid (ATRA), and analogues and derivatives thereof.
- agents that stimulate cellular proliferation include: sphingosine 1-phosphate receptor agonist (e.g., FTY-720 (1,3- propanediol, 2-amino-2-(2-(4-octylphenyl)ethyl)-,hydrochloride; immunostimulants, such as lmupedone (methanone, [5-amino-2-(4-methyl-l-piperidinyl)phenyl](4-chlorophenyl)-, DIAPEP227 synthetic peptide (Peptor Ltd., Israel)); and nerve growth factor agonist, e.g., NG-012 (5H,9H, 13H,21 H,25H,-dibenzo[k,u] [1 ,5,9, 15,19] pentaoxacyclotetracosin-S ⁇ , 13,21 ,25-pentone, 7,8, 11 ,12, 15, 16,23,24,27,28-decahydro-2,4, 18,20-
- cytokines are biologically active molecules including growth factors and active peptides, which aid in healing or regrowth of normal tissue.
- the function of cytokines is two-fold: 1) they can incite local cells to produce new collagen or tissue, or 2) they can attract cells to the site in need of correction.
- cytokines, as well as appropriate combinations of cytokines serve to encourage "biological anchoring" of an implant within the host tissue, by facilitating the regrowth and remodeling of the implant into normal bone tissue. Cytokines may also be used in the treatment of wounds.
- cytokines include, by way of illustration and not limitation, transforming growth factors (TGFs); fibroblast growth factors (FGFs), including both acidic FGF and basic FGF; platelet derived growth factors (PDGFs) such as PDGF-AA, PDGF-AB, and PDGF-BB; epidermal growth factors (EGFs); connective tissue activated peptides (CTAPs); colony stimulating factors (CSFs); erythropoietin (EPO); nerve growth factor (NGF); osteogenic factors; ⁇ -thromboglobulin; tumor necrosis factors (TNFs); interleukins; interferons (IFNs); bone morphogenic protein (BMP); and biologically active analogs, fragments, and derivatives of such growth factors.
- TGFs transforming growth factors
- FGFs fibroblast growth factors
- FGFs fibroblast growth factors
- PDGFs platelet derived growth factors
- EGFs epidermal growth factors
- CSFs connective tissue activated
- TGF transforming growth factor
- TGF- ⁇ and the beta transforming growth factors include TGF- ⁇ and the beta transforming growth factors (for example, TGF- ⁇ l, TGF- ⁇ 2, TGF- ⁇ 3); bone morphogenetic proteins (for example, BMP-I, BMP-2, BMP-3, BMP-4, BMP-5, BMP-6, BMP-7, BMP-8, BMP-9); heparin- binding growth factors, e.g., FGFs; EGFs; PDGFs; insulin-like growth factors (IGFs); inhibins such as Inhibin A and Inhibin B; growth differentiating factors, e.g., GDF-I); and activins such as Activin A, Activin B, Activin AB.
- TGF- ⁇ and the beta transforming growth factors for example, TGF- ⁇ l, TGF- ⁇ 2, TGF- ⁇ 3
- bone morphogenetic proteins for example, BMP-I, BMP-2, BMP-3, BMP-4, BMP
- Growth factors can be isolated from native or natural sources, such as from mammalian cells, or can be prepared synthetically, such as by recombinant DNA techniques or by various chemical processes.
- analogs, fragments, or derivatives of these factors can be used, provided that they exhibit at least some of the biological activity of the native molecule.
- analogs can be prepared by expression of genes altered by site-specific mutagenesis or other genetic engineering techniques.
- the resulting matrix has a net positive charge and can be used to ionically bind and deliver negatively charged compounds.
- a molar excess of electrophilic groups are used, the resulting matrix has a net negative charge and can be used to ionically bind and deliver positively charged compounds.
- negatively and positively charged compounds that can be delivered from these matrices include various drugs, cells, proteins, and polysaccharides.
- Negatively charged collagens such as succinylated collagen, and glycosaminoglycan derivatives such as sodium hyaluronate, keratan sulfate, keratosulfate, sodium chondroitin sulfate A, sodium dermatan sulfate B, sodium chondroitin sulfate C, heparin, esterif ⁇ ed chondroitin sulfate C, and esterified heparin, can also be effectively incorporated into the matrix as described above.
- Positively charged collagens such as methylated collagen, and glycosaminoglycan derivatives such as esterified deacetylated hyaluronic acid, esterif ⁇ ed deacetylated desulfated chondroitin sulfate A, esterified deacetylated desulfated chondroitin sulfate C, deacetylated desulfated keratan sulfate, deacetylated desulfated keratosulfate, esterified desulfated heparin, and chitosan, can also be similarly incorporated.
- glycosaminoglycan derivatives such as esterified deacetylated hyaluronic acid, esterif ⁇ ed deacetylated desulfated chondroitin sulfate A, esterified deacetylated desulfated chondroitin sulfate C, deacetylated desulfated keratan
- biologically active agents such as fibrosis-inhibiting agents may be delivered from the composition to a local tissue site in order to inhibit scar formation, tissue healing, and/or regeneration.
- a method is provided for delivering a biologically active agent, where the composition also includes the biologically active agent (e.g., a fibrosis-inhibiting agent) to be delivered, and steps (a) and (b) are as described for the method of sealing tissue. Step (c) would involve allowing a three-dimensional matrix to form to deliver the biologically active agent.
- Compositions that include a fibrosis-inhibiting agent may be used in a variety of applications, including, without limitation, surgical adhesion prevention and medical devices coatings. Numerous therapeutic compounds have been identified that are of utility in the invention including:
- the pharmacologically active compound is an angiogenesis inhibitor, such as, for example, 2-ME (NSC-659853), PI-88 (D-mannose), O-6-O-phosphono-alpha-D- mannopyranosyl-( 1 -3 )-O-alpha-D-mannopyranosy l-( 1 -3 )-O-alpha-D-mannopyranosyl-( 1 -3 )-O-alpha- D-mannopyranosyl-( 1 -2)- hydrogen sulphate), thalidomide (l H-isoindole-l,3(2H)-dione, 2-(2,6- dioxo-3-piperidinyl)-), CDC-394, CC-5079, ENMD-0995 (S-3-amino-phthalidoglutarimide), AVE- 8062A, vatalanib, SH-268, halofuginone hydrobromide,
- Angiogenesis inhibitors also include antagonists of angiogenin, placental growth factor, angiopoietin-1, platelet- derived endothelial cell growth factor, DeI-I, platelet-derived growth factor-BB, aFGF, bFGF, pleiotrophin, follistatin, proliferin, granulocyte colony-stimulating factor, transforming growth factor- alpha, hepatocyte growth factor, transforming growth factor-beta, interleukin-8, tumor necrosis factor- alpha, leptin, vascular endothelial growth factor, midkine, progranulin, 2-methoxyestradiol (PANZEM) (EntreMed), A6, ABT-510, ABX-IL8 (Abgenix), actimid, Ad5FGF-4 (Collateral Therapeutics), AG3340 (Agouron Pharmaceuticals Inc.
- alpha5betal integrin antibody LaJoIIa, Calif.
- alpha5betal integrin antibody AMGOOl (AnGes/Daichi Pharmaceuticals), anecortave acetate (Retaane, Alcon), angiocol, angiogenix (Endovasc Ltd), angiostatin (EntreMed), angiozyme, antiangiogenic antithrombin 3 (Genzyme Molecular Oncology), anti-VEGF (Genentech), anti-VEGF Mab, aplidine, aptosyn, ATN- 161 , avastin (bevacizumab), AVE8062A, Bay 12-9566 (Bayer Corp.
- BioBypass CAD VEGF-121 (GenVec), MS275291, CAI (carboxy-amido imidazole), carboxymidotriazole, CC 4047 (Celgene), CC 5013 (Celgene), CC7085, CDC 801 (Celgene), Celebrex (Celecoxib), CEP-7055, CGP-41251/PKC412, cilengitide, CMlOl (Carborned Brentwood, Tenn.), col-3 (CollaGenex Pharmaceuticals Inc.
- Anti-angiogensis compounds found in vivo may be used in the compositions and methods described including angiostatin (plasminogen fragment), metalloproteinase inhibitors (TIMPs), antiangiogenic antithrombin III (aaATIII), pigment epithelial-derived factor (PEDF), canstatin, placental ribonuclease inhibitor, cartilage-derived inhibitor (CDI), plasminogen activator inhibitor, CD59 complement fragment, platelet factor-4 (PF4), endostatin (collagen XVIII fragment), prolactin 16kD fragment, f ⁇ bronectin fragment, proliferin-related protein, gro-beta, retinoids, heparinases, tetrahydrocortisol-S, heparin hexasaccharide fragment, thrombospondin-1, human chorionic gonadotropin (hCG), transforming growth factor-beta, interferon alpha/beta/gamma,
- Compounds that inhibit, block, or antagonize the angiogenic activity of the following species in vivo may be used in the methods and compositions described herein including angiogenin, placental growth factor, angiopoietin-1, platelet-derived endothelial cell growth factor (PD-ECGF), DeI-I, platelet-derived growth factor-BB (PDGF-BB), fibroblast growth factors: acidic (aFGF) and basic (bFGF), pleiotrophin (PTN), follistatin, proliferin, granulocyte colony-stimulating factor (G- CSF), transforming growth factor-alpha (TGF-alpha), hepatocyte growth factor (HGF) /scatter factor (SF), transforming growth factor-beta (TGF-beta), interleukin-8 (IL-8), tumor necrosis factor-alpha (TNF-alpha), leptin, vascular endothelial growth factor (VEGF)/vascular permeabil
- Protein Protein, Angiostatin Kl-3, Angiostatin Kl-5, Captopril, DL-alpha- Difluoromethylomithine, DL-alpha-Difluoromethylomithine HCl, His-Tag.RTM. Endostatin.TM.
- the pharmacologically active compound is a 5-lipoxygenase inhibitor or antagonist (e.g., Wy-50295 (2-naphthaleneacetic acid, alpha-methyl-6-(2- quinolinylmethoxy)-, (S)-), ONO-LP-269 (2,11,14-eicosatrienamide, N-(4-hydroxy-2-(lH-tetrazol-5- yl)-8-quinolinyl)-, (E,Z,Z)-), licofelone (lH-pyrrolizine-5-acetic acid, 6-(4-chlorophenyl)-2,3- dihydro-2,2-dimethyl-7-phenyl-), CMI-568 (urea, N-butyl-N-hydroxy-N'-(4-(3-(methylsulfonyl)-2- propoxy-5-(tetrahydro-5-(3,4,5-trimethoxyphenyl)-2-furanyl)phenoxy
- the pharmacologically active compound is a chemokine receptor antagonist which inhibits one or more subtypes of CCR (1, 3, and 5) (e.g., ONO-4128 (1,4,9- triazaspiro(5.5)undecane-2,5-dione, l-butyl-3-(cyclohexylmethyl)-9-((2,3-dihydro-l,4-benzodioxin-6- yl)methyl-), L-381, CT-112 (L-arginine, L-threonyl-L-threonyl-L-seryl-L-glutarninyl-L-valyl-L- arginyl-L-prolyl-), AS-900004, SCH-C, ZK-81 1752, PD-172084, UK-427857, SB-380732, vMIP II, SB-265610, DPC- 168, TAK-779 (N, N-dimethyl-
- CCR 1, 3, and
- chemokine receptor antagonists include a-Immunokine-NNS03, BX-471, CCX-282, Sch-350634; Sch-351125; Sch-417690; SCH-C, and analogues and derivatives thereof.
- the pharmacologically active compound is a cell cycle inhibitor.
- taxanes e.g., paclitaxel (discussed in more detail below) and docetaxel
- docetaxel e.g., paclitaxel (discussed in more detail below) and docetaxel
- paclitaxel discussed in more detail below
- docetaxel e.g., docetaxel
- etanidazole e.g., paclitaxel (discussed in more detail below) and docetaxel
- nimorazole etanidazole
- nimorazole B.A. Chabner and D.L. Longo.
- 2-Nitroimidazole derivatives useful as radiosensitizers for hypoxic tumor cells.
- Heterocyclic compound derivative, production thereof and radiosensitizer and antiviral agent containing said derivative as active ingredient Publication Number 01 1 106775 A (Japan), Oct. 22,1987; T. Suzuki et al. Heterocyclic compound derivative, production thereof and radiosensitizer, antiviral agent and anti cancer agent containing said derivative as active ingredient. Publication Number 01 139596 A (Japan), Nov. 25, 1987; S. Sakaguchi et al. Heterocyclic compound derivative, its production and radiosensitizer containing said derivative as active ingredient; Publication Number 63170375 A (Japan), Jan. 7, 1987), fluorine containing 3-nitro-l,2,4-triazole (T. Kagitani et al.
- Novel fluorine-containing 3-nitro-l,2,4-triazole and radiosensitizer containing same compound Publication Number 02076861 A (Japan), Mar. 31, 1988), 5-thiotretrazole derivative or its salt (E. Kano et al. Radiosensitizer for Hypoxic cell. Publication Number 6101051 1 A (Japan), Jun. 26, 1984), Nitrothiazole (T. Kagitani et al. Radiation-sensitizing agent. Publication Number 61 167616 A (Japan) Jan. 22, 1985), imidazole derivatives (S. Inayma et al. Imidazole derivative. Publication Number 6203767 A (Japan) Aug.
- camptothecin Ewend M.G. et al. Local delivery of chemotherapy and concurrent external beam radiotherapy prolongs survival in metastatic brain tumor models. Cancer Research 56(22):5217-5223, 1996) and paclitaxel (Tishler R.B. et al. Taxol: a novel radiation sensitizer. International Journal of Radiation Oncology and Biological Physics 22(3):613-617, 1992).
- a number of the above-mentioned cell cycle inhibitors also have a wide variety of analogues and derivatives, including, but not limited to, cisplatin, cyclophosphamide, misonidazole, tiripazamine, nitrosourea, mercaptopurine, methotrexate, flurouracil, epirubicin, doxorubicin, vindesine and etoposide.
- Analogues and derivatives include (CPA) 2 Pt(DOLYM) and (DACH)Pt(DOLYM) cisplatin (Choi et al., Arch. Pharmacol Res.
- 6-mercaptopurine (6-MP) (Kashida et al., Biol. Pharm. Bull. 18(11):1492-7, 1995), 7,8-polymethyleneimidazo-l,3,2- diazaphosphorines (Nilov et al., Mendeleev Commun. 2:67, 1995), azathioprine (Chifotides et al., J. Inorg. Biochem. 56(4):249-64, 1994), methyl-D-glucopyranoside mercaptopurine derivatives (Da Silva et al., Eur. J. Med. Chem.
- methotrexate tetrahydroquinazoline analogue (Gangjee, et al., J. Heterocycl. Chem. 32(1):243- 8, 1995), N-( ⁇ -aminoacyl) methotrexate derivatives (Cheung et al., Pteridines 3(1-2): 101-2, 1992), biotin methotrexate derivatives (Fan et al., Pteridines 3(1 -2): 131-2, 1992), D-glutamic acid or D- erythrou, threo-4-fluoroglutamic acid methotrexate analogues (McGuire et al., Biochem. Pharmacol.
- N-(L-Ot- aminoacyl) methotrexate derivatives Cheung et al., Heterocycles 28(2):751-8, 1989), meta and ortho isomers of aminopterin (Rosowsky et al., J. Med. Chem. 32( 12):2582, 1989), hydroxymethylmethotrexate (DE 267495), ⁇ -fluoromethotrexate (McGuire et al., Cancer Res. 49( ⁇ 6):4517-25, 1989), polyglutamyl methotrexate derivatives (Kumar et al., Cancer Res.
- the cell cycle inhibitor is paclitaxel, a compound which disrupts mitosis (M-phase) by binding to tubulin to form abnormal mitotic spindles or an analogue or derivative thereof.
- paclitaxel is a highly derivatized diterpenoid (Wani et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc. 93:2325, 1971) which has been obtained from the harvested and dried bark of Taxus brevifolia (Pacific Yew) and Taxomyces Andreanae and Endophytic Fungus of the Pacific Yew (Stierle et al., Science 60:214-216, 1993).
- “Paclitaxel” (which should be understood herein to include formulations, prodrugs, analogues and derivatives such as, for example, TAXOL (Bristol Myers Squibb, New York, NY, TAXOTERE (Aventis Pharmaceuticals, France), docetaxel, 10-desacetyl analogues of paclitaxel and 3'N-desbenzoyl-3'N-t-butoxy carbonyl analogues of paclitaxel) may be readily prepared utilizing techniques known to those skilled in the art ⁇ see, e.g., Schiff et al., Nature 277:665-667, 1979; Long and Fairchild, Cancer Research 54:4355-4361, 1994; Ringel and Horwitz, J.
- paclitaxel derivatives or analogues include 7-deoxy-docetaxol, 7,8-cyclopropataxanes, N-substituted 2-azetidones, 6,7-epoxy paclitaxels, 6,7-modified paclitaxels, 10-desacetoxytaxol, 10-deacetyltaxol (from 10-deacetylbaccatin III), phosphonooxy and carbonate derivatives of taxol, taxol 2',7-di(sodium 1 ,2-benzenedicarboxylate, 10-desacetoxy- 1 1,12- dihydrotaxol-10,12(18)-diene derivatives, 10-desacetoxytaxol, Protaxol (2'-and/or 7-O-ester derivatives), (2'-and/or 7-O-carbonate derivatives), asymmetric synthesis of taxol side chain, fluoro taxols, 9-deoxotaxane, (13-
- gray-highlighted portions may be substituted and the non-highlighted portion is the taxane core.
- a side-chain (labeled "A" in the diagram) is desirably present in order for the compound to have good activity as a cell cycle inhibitor.
- Examples of compounds having this structure include paclitaxel (Merck Index entry 7117), docetaxol (TAXOTERE, Merck Index entry 3458), and 3'- desphenyl-3'-(4-ntirophenyl)-N-debenzoyl-N-(t-butoxycarbonyl)-10-deacetyltaxol.
- taxanes such as paclitaxel and its analogues and derivatives are disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 5,440,056 as having the structure of formula (IV):
- X may be oxygen (paclitaxel), hydrogen (9-deoxy derivatives), thioacyl, or dihydroxyl precursors;
- R 1 is selected from paclitaxel or TAXOTERE side chains or alkanoyl having the structure of formula (V)
- R 7 is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, phenyl, alkoxy, amino, phenoxy (substituted or unsubstituted);
- R 8 is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, phenyl (substituted or unsubstituted), alpha or beta-naphthyl;
- R 9 is selected from hydrogen, alkanoyl, substituted alkanoyl, and aminoalkanoyl; where substitutions refer to hydroxyl, sulfhydryl, allalkoxyl, carboxyl, halogen, thioalkoxyl, N,N-dimethylamino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, nitro, and -OSO 3 H, and/or may refer to groups containing such substitutions;
- R 2 is selected from hydrogen or oxygen- containing groups, such as hydrogen, hydroxyl, alkoyl, alkanoyloxy,
- the paclitaxel analogues and derivatives useful as cell cycle inhibitors are disclosed in PCT International Patent Application No. WO 93/10076.
- the analogue or derivative should have a side chain attached to the taxane nucleus at Cn, as shown in the structure of formula VI, in order to confer antitumor activity to the taxane.
- WO 93/10076 discloses that the taxane nucleus may be substituted at any position with the exception of the existing methyl groups.
- the substitutions may include, for example, hydrogen, alkanoyloxy, alkenoyloxy, aryloyloxy.
- oxo groups may be attached to carbons labeled 2, 4, 9, and/or 10.
- an oxetane ring may be attached at carbons 4 and 5.
- an oxirane ring may be attached to the carbon labeled 4.
- the taxane-based cell cycle inhibitor useful in the present invention is disclosed in U.S. Patent 5,440,056, which discloses 9-deoxo taxanes. These are compounds lacking an oxo group at the carbon labeled 9 in the taxane structure shown above (formula VI).
- the taxane ring may be substituted at the carbons labeled 1, 7 and 10 (independently) with H, OH, O-R, or O- CO-R where R is an alkyl or an aminoalkyl.
- it may be substituted at carbons labeled 2 and 4 (independently) with aryol, alkanoyl, aminoalkanoyl or alkyl groups.
- the side chain of formula (V) may be substituted at R 7 and R 8 (independently) with phenyl rings, substituted phenyl rings, linear alkanes/alkenes, and groups containing H, O or N.
- R 9 may be substituted with H, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkanoyl group.
- Taxanes in general, and paclitaxel is particular, is considered to function as a cell cycle inhibitor by acting as an anti-microtubule agent, and more specifically as a stabilizer. These compounds have been shown useful in the treatment of proliferative disorders, including: non-small cell (NSC) lung; small cell lung; breast; prostate; cervical; endometrial; head and neck cancers.
- NSC non-small cell
- the anti-microtuble agent is albendazole (carbamic acid, [5-(propylthio)-lH-benzimidazol-2-yl]-, methyl ester), LY-355703 (l,4-dioxa-8,l 1- diazacyclohexadec-13-ene-2,5,9,12-tetrone, 10-[(3-chloro-4-methoxyphenyl)methyl]-6,6-dimethyl-3- (2-methylpropyl)- 16-[( 1 S)- 1 -[(2S,3R)-3-phenyloxiranyl]ethyl]-, (3 S, 1 OR, 13E, 16S)-), vindesine (vincaleukoblastine, 3-(aminocarbonyl)-O4-deacetyl-3-de(methoxycarbonyl)-), or WAY-174286 [0297]
- the cell cycle is albendazole (carbamic acid, [5-(prop
- R 1 can be a formyl or methyl group or alternately H.
- Ri can also be an alkyl group or an aldehyde-substituted alkyl (e.g. , CH 2 CHO).
- R 2 is typically a CH 3 or NH 2 group; however it can be alternately substituted with a lower alkyl ester or the ester linking to the dihydroindole core may be substituted with C(O)-R where R is NH 2 , an amino acid ester or a peptide ester.
- R 3 is typically C(O)CH 3 , CH 3 or H.
- a protein fragment may be linked by a bifunctional group, such as maleoyl amino acid.
- R 3 can also be substituted to form an alkyl ester which may be further substituted.
- R 4 may be -CH 2 - or a single bond.
- R 5 and R 6 may be H, OH or a lower alkyl, typically -CH 2 CH 3 .
- R 6 and R 7 may together form an oxetane ring.
- R 7 may alternately be H.
- substitutions include molecules wherein methyl groups are substituted with other alkyl groups, and whereby unsaturated rings may be derivatized by the addition of a side group such as an alkane, alkene, alkyne, halogen, ester, amide or amino group.
- Exemplary vinca alkaloids are vinblastine, vincristine, vincristine sulfate, vindesine, and vinorelbine, having the structures of formula (VIII):
- Analogues typically require the side group (shaded area) in order to have activity. These compounds are thought to act as cell cycle inhibitors by functioning as anti-microtubule agents, and more specifically to inhibit polymerization. These compounds have been shown useful in treating proliferative disorders, including NSC lung; small cell lung; breast; prostate; brain; head and neck; retinoblastoma; bladder; and penile cancers; and soft tissue sarcoma.
- the cell cycle inhibitor is a camptothecin, or an analog or derivative thereof.
- Camptothecins have the following general structure of formula (IX):
- X is typically O, but can be other groups, e.g., NH in the case of 21 -lactam derivatives.
- Ri is typically H or OH, but may be other groups, e.g., a terminally hydroxylated C 1-3 alkane.
- R 2 is typically H or an amino containing group such as (CH 3 ) 2 NHCH 2 , but may be other groups e.g., NO 2 , NH 2 , halogen (as disclosed in, e.g., U.S. Patent 5,552,156) or a short alkane containing these groups.
- R 3 is typically H or a short alkyl such as C 2 H 5 .
- R 4 is typically H but may be other groups, e.g., a methylenedioxy group with R 1
- camptothecin compounds include topotecan, irinotecan (CPT-11), 9- aminocamptothecin, 21-lactam-20(S)-camptothecin, 10,1 1-methylenedioxycamptothecin, SN-38, 9- nitrocamptothecin, 10-hydroxycamptothecin.
- Exemplary compounds have the structures of formula (X):
- Camptothecins have the five rings shown here.
- the ring labeled E must be intact (the lactone rather than carboxylate form) for maximum activity and minimum toxicity.
- These compounds are useful to as cell cycle inhibitors, where they can function as topoisomerase I inhibitors and/or DNA cleavage agents. They have been shown useful in the treatment of proliferative disorders, including, for example, NSC lung; small cell lung; and cervical cancers.
- the cell cycle inhibitor is a podophyllotoxin, or a derivative or an analogue thereof.
- Exemplary compounds of this type are etoposide or teniposide, which have the following structures of formula (XI):
- DNA topoisomerase inhibitor is lurtotecan dihydrochloride (HH- l,4-dioxino[2,3-g]pyrano[3',4':6,7]indolizino[l,2-b]quinoline-9,12(8H,14H)-dione, 8-ethyl-2,3- dihydro-8-hydroxy- 15-[(4-methyl- 1 -piperazinyl)methyl]-, dihydrochloride, (S)-).
- the cell cycle inhibitor is an anthracycline.
- Anthracyclines have the following general structure of formula (XII), where the R groups may be a variety of organic groups:
- R groups are: R, is CH 3 or CH 2 OH; R 2 is daunosamine or H; R 3 and R 4 are independently one of OH, NO 2 , NH 2 , F, Cl, Br, I, CN, H or groups derived from these; R 5-7 are all H or R 5 and R 6 are H and R 7 and Rg are alkyl or halogen, or vice versa: R 7 and R 8 are H and R 5 and R 6 are alkyl or halogen.
- R 2 may be a conjugated peptide.
- R 5 may be OH or an ether linked alkyl group.
- Ri may also be linked to the anthracycline ring by a group other than C(O), such as an alkyl or branched alkyl group having the C(O) linking moiety at its end, such as -CH 2 CH(CH 2 -X)C(O)-Ri, wherein X is H or an alkyl group (see, e.g., U.S. Patent 4,215,062).
- R 3 may have the following structure of formula (XIII):
- Rg is OH either in or out of the plane of the ring, or is a second sugar moiety such as R 3 .
- R] 0 may be H or form a secondary amine with a group such as an aromatic group, saturated or partially saturated 5 or 6 membered heterocyclic having at least one ring nitrogen (see U.S. Patent 5,843,903).
- R 10 may be derived from an amino acid, having the structure -C(O)CH(NHRi i)(R ]2 ), in which R n is H, or forms a C3- 4 membered alkylene with R 12 .
- R 12 may be H, alkyl, aminoalkyl, amino, hydroxy, mercapto, phenyl, benzyl or methylthio (see U.S. Patent 4,296,105).
- exemplary anthracyclines are doxorubicin, daunorubicin, idarubicin, epirubicin, pirarubicin, zorubicin, and carubicin. Suitable compounds have the structures of formula (XIV):
- anthracyclines are anthramycin, mitoxantrone, menogaril, nogalamycin, aclacinomycin A, olivomycin A, chromomycin A 3 , and plicamycin having the structures:
- the cell cycle inhibitor is a platinum compound.
- suitable platinum complexes may be of Pt(II) or Pt(FV) and have this basic structure of formula (XV):
- X and Y are anionic leaving groups such as sulfate, phosphate, carboxylate, and halogen; R
- and R 2 are alkyl, amine, amino alkyl any may be further substituted, and are basically inert or bridging groups.
- Pt(II) complexes Z 1 and Z 2 are non-existent.
- Pt(FV) Zi and Z 2 may be anionic groups such as halogen, hydroxy, carboxylate, ester, sulfate or phosphate. See, e.g., U.S. Patent Nos. 4,588,831 and 4,250, 189.
- Suitable platinum complexes may contain multiple Pt atoms. See, e.g., U.S. Patent Nos. 5,409,915 and 5,380,897.
- Exemplary platinum compounds are cisplatin, carboplatin, oxaliplatin, and miboplatin having the structures:
- Oxaliplatin [0317] These compounds are thought to function as cell cycle inhibitors by binding to DNA, i.e., acting as alkylating agents of DNA. These compounds have been shown useful in the treatment of cell proliferative disorders, including, e.g., NSC lung; small cell lung; breast; cervical; brain; head and neck; esophageal; retinoblastom; liver; bile duct; bladder; penile; and vulvar cancers; and soft tissue sarcoma.
- the cell cycle inhibitor is a nitrosourea.
- Nitrosourease have the following general formula (XVI), where typical R groups are shown below.
- R groups include cyclic alkanes, alkanes, halogen substituted groups, sugars, aryl and heteroaryl groups, phosphonyl and sulfonyl groups. As disclosed in U.S. Patent No.
- R may suitably be CH 2 -C(X)(Y)(Z), wherein X and Y may be the same or different members of the following groups: phenyl, cyclyhexyl, or a phenyl or cyclohexyl group substituted with groups such as halogen, lower alkyl (C M ), trifluore methyl, cyano, phenyl, cyclohexyl, lower alkyloxy (C M ).
- Z has the following structure: -alkylene-N-R
- Ri and R 2 may be the same or different members of the following group: lower alkyl (Ci -4 ) and benzyl, or together R) and R 2 may form a saturated 5 or 6 membered heterocyclic such as pyrrolidine, piperidine, morfoline, thiomorfoline, N-lower alkyl piperazine, where the heterocyclic may be optionally substituted with lower alkyl groups.
- R and R 1 of formula (XVI) may be the same or different, where each may be a substituted or unsubstituted hydrocarbon having 1-10 carbons. Substitutions may include hydrocarbyl, halo, ester, amide, carboxylic acid, ether, thioether and alcohol groups. As disclosed in U.S. Patent No.
- R of formula (XVI) may be an amide bond and a pyranose structure (e.g., methyl 2'-(N-(N-(2-chloroethyl)-N-nitroso-carbamoyl)- glycyl)amino-2'-deoxy- ⁇ -D-glucopyranoside).
- R of formula (XVI) may be an alkyl group of 2 to 6 carbons and may be substituted with an ester, sulfonyl, or hydroxyl group. It may also be substituted with a carboxylic acid or CONH 2 group.
- Exemplary nitrosoureas are BCNU (carmustine), methyl-CCNU (semustine), CCNU (lomustine), ranimustine, nimustine, chlorozotocin, fotemustine, and streptozocin, having the following structures:
- nitrosourea compounds are thought to function as cell cycle inhibitors by binding to DNA, that is, by functioning as DNA alkylating agents. These cell cycle inhibitors have been shown useful in treating cell proliferative disorders such as, for example, islet cell; small cell lung; melanoma; and brain cancers.
- the cell cycle inhibitor is a nitroimidazole, where exemplary nitroimidazoles are metronidazole, benznidazole, etanidazole, and misonidazole, having the structure of formula (XVII):
- Suitable nitroimidazole compounds are disclosed in, e.g., U.S. Patent Nos. 4,371 ,540 and
- the cell cycle inhibitor is a folic acid antagonist, such as methotrexate or derivatives or analogues thereof, including edatrexate, trimetrexate, raltitrexed, piritrexim, denopterin, tomudex, and pteropterin.
- Methotrexate analogues have the following general structure of formula
- R 1 may be N
- R 2 may be N or C(CH 3 )
- R 3 and R 3 ' may H or alkyl, e.g., CH 3
- R 4 may be a single bond or NR, where R is H or alkyl group.
- R 5>6,8 may be H, OCH 3 , or alternately they can be halogens or hydro groups.
- R 7 is a side chain of the general structure of formula (XIX):
- the carboxyl groups in the side chain may be esterified or form a salt such as a Zn 2+ salt.
- R 9 and Ri 0 can be NH 2 or may be alkyl substituted.
- Exemplary folic acid antagonist compounds have the structures of formulas (XX) and
- the cell cycle inhibitor is a cytidine analogue, such as cytarabine or derivatives or analogues thereof, including enocitabine, FMdC ((E(-2'-deoxy-2'- (fluoromethylene)cytidine), gemcitabine, 5-azacitidine, ancitabine, and 6-azauridine.
- cytidine analogue such as cytarabine or derivatives or analogues thereof, including enocitabine, FMdC ((E(-2'-deoxy-2'- (fluoromethylene)cytidine), gemcitabine, 5-azacitidine, ancitabine, and 6-azauridine.
- exemplary compounds have the structure of formula (XXII) :
- the cell cycle inhibitor is a pyrimidine analogue.
- the pyrimidine analogues have the general structure of formula (XXIII):
- positions 2', 3' and 5' on the sugar ring can be H, hydroxyl, phosphoryl (see, e.g., U.S. Patent 4,086,417) or ester (see, e.g., U.S. Patent 3,894,000).
- Esters can be of alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl or heterocyclo/aryl types.
- the 2' carbon can be hydroxylated at either R 2 or R 2 ', the other group is H. Alternately, the 2' carbon can be substituted with halogens e.g., fluoro or difluoro cytidines such as Gemcytabine.
- the sugar can be substituted for another heterocyclic group such as a furyl group or for an alkane, an alkyl ether or an amide linked alkane such as C(O)NH(CH 2 ) 5 CH 3 .
- the 2° amine can be substituted with an aliphatic acyl (R 1 ) linked with an amide (see, e.g., U.S. Patent 3,991,045) or urethane (see, e.g., U.S. Patent 3,894,000) bond. It can also be further substituted to form a quaternary ammonium salt.
- R 5 in the pyrimidine ring may be N or CR, where R is H, halogen containing groups, or alkyl (see, e.g., U.S. Patent No. 4,086,417).
- R 8 is H or R 7 and R 8 together can form a double bond or Rg can be X, where X is a structure of formula (XXIV):
- the cell cycle inhibitor is a fluoropyrimidine analogue, such as 5- fluorouracil, or an analogue or derivative thereof, including carmofur, doxifluridine, emitefur, tegafur, and floxuridine.
- fluoropyrimidine analogue such as 5- fluorouracil
- an analogue or derivative thereof including carmofur, doxifluridine, emitefur, tegafur, and floxuridine.
- XXV formulas
- fluoropyrimidine analogues include 5-FudR (5-fluoro-deoxyuridine), or an analogue or derivative thereof, including 5-iododeoxyuridine (5-IudR), 5-bromodeoxyuridine (5- BudR), fluorouridine triphosphate (5-FUTP), and fluorodeoxyuridine monophosphate (5-dFUMP).
- 5-FudR 5-fluoro-deoxyuridine
- 5-IudR 5-bromodeoxyuridine
- 5-FUTP fluorouridine triphosphate
- fluorouridine monophosphate 5-dFUMP
- Exemplary compounds have the structures of formula (XXVI):
- the cell cycle inhibitor is a purine analogue.
- Purine analogues have the following general structure of formula (XXVII):
- X-R2 is -CH 2 CH(OH)-.
- a second carbon atom is inserted in the ring between X and the adjacent nitrogen atom.
- the X-N double bond becomes a single bond.
- N signifies nitrogen and V, W, X, Z can be either carbon or nitrogen with the following provisos.
- Ring A may have 0 to 3 nitrogen atoms in its structure. If two nitrogens are present in ring A, one must be in the W position. If only one is present, it must not be in the Q position. V and Q must not be simultaneously nitrogen. Z and Q must not be simultaneously nitrogen. IfZ is nitrogen, R 3 is not present.
- Ri -3 are independently one of H, halogen, Ci -7 alkyl, Ci -7 alkenyl, hydroxyl, mercapto, Ci -7 alkylthio, C 1 ⁇ alkoxy, C 2-7 alkenyloxy, aryl oxy, nitro, primary, secondary or tertiary amine containing group.
- Rs -8 are H or up to two of the positions may contain independently one of OH, halogen, cyano, azido, substituted amino, R5 and R 7 can together form a double bond.
- Y is H, a C 1 . 7 alkylcarbonyl, or a mono- di or tri phosphate.
- Exemplary suitable purine analogues include 6-mercaptopurine, thiguanosine, thiamiprine, cladribine, fludaribine, tubercidin, puromycin, pentoxyfilline; where these compounds may optionally be phosphorylated.
- Exemplary compounds have the structures of formulas (XXIX) and (XXX):
- the cell cycle inhibitor is a nitrogen mustard.
- nitrogen mustards are known and are suitably used as a cell cycle inhibitor in the present invention.
- Suitable nitrogen mustards are also known as cyclophosphamides.
- a preferred nitrogen mustard has the general structure of formula (XXXI):
- alkane typically CH 2 CH(CH 3 )Cl, or a polycyclic group such as B, or a substituted phenyl such as C or a heterocyclic group such as D.
- R 1-2 are H or CH 2 CH 2 Cl;
- R 3 is H or oxygen-containing groups such as hydroperoxy; and
- R 4 can be alkyl, aryl, heterocyclic.
- the cyclic moiety need not be intact. See, e.g., U.S. Patent Nos. 5,472,956, 4,908,356, 4,841,085 that describe the following type of structure of formula (XXXII):
- Ri is H or CH 2 CH 2 Cl, and R 2-6 are various substituent groups.
- Exemplary nitrogen mustards include methylchloroethamine, and analogues or derivatives thereof, including methylchloroethamine oxide hydrohchloride, novembichin, and mannomustine (a halogenated sugar).
- Exemplary compounds have the following structures:
- the nitrogen mustard may be cyclophosphamide, ifosfamide, perfosfamide, or torofosfamide, where these compounds have the structures of formula (XXXIII):
- the nitrogen mustard may be estramustine, or an analogue or derivative thereof, including phenesterine, prednimustine, and estramustine PO 4 .
- suitable nitrogen mustard type cell cycle inhibitors of the present invention have the structures of formulas (XXXIV) and (XXXV): (XXXIV)
- the nitrogen mustard may be chlorambucil, or an analogue or derivative thereof, including melphalan and chlormaphazine.
- suitable nitrogen mustard type cell cycle inhibitors of the present invention have the structures of formula (XXXVI):
- the nitrogen mustard may be uracil mustard, which has the structure of formula (XXXVII):
- the nitrogen mustards are thought to function as cell cycle inhibitors by serving as alkylating agents for DNA. Nitrogen mustards have been shown useful in the treatment of cell proliferative disorders including, for example, small cell lung, breast, cervical, head and neck, prostate, retinoblastoma, and soft tissue sarcoma.
- the cell cycle inhibitor of the present invention may be a hydroxyurea. Hydroxyureas have the following general structure of formula (XXXVIII):
- Suitable hydroxyureas are disclosed in, for example, U.S. Patent No. 6,080,874, wherein R 1 is a group represented by the structure of formula (XXXIX):
- R 2 is an alkyl group having 1-4 carbons and R 3 is one of H, acyl, methyl, ethyl, and mixtures thereof, such as a methylether.
- Ri is a cycloalkenyl group, for example N-(3-(5-(4-fluorophenylthio)-furyl)-2-cyclopenten-l-yl)N- hydroxyurea; R 2 is H or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbons and R 3 is H; X is H or a cation.
- the hydroxy urea has the structure of formula (XLI):
- Hydroxyureas are thought to function as cell cycle inhibitors by serving to inhibit DNA synthesis.
- the cell cycle inhibitor is a mytomicin, such as mitomycin C, or an analogue or derivative thereof, such as porphyromycin.
- mytomicin such as mitomycin C
- an analogue or derivative thereof such as porphyromycin.
- Exemplary compounds have the structures of formula (XLII):
- Mitomycins have been shown useful in the treatment of cell proliferative disorders such as, for example, esophageal, liver, bladder, and breast cancers.
- the cell cycle inhibitor is an alkyl sulfonate, such as busulfan, or an analogue or derivative thereof, such as treosulfan, improsulfan, piposulfan, and pipobroman.
- alkyl sulfonate such as busulfan
- an analogue or derivative thereof such as treosulfan, improsulfan, piposulfan, and pipobroman.
- Exemplary compounds have the following structures:
- the cell cycle inhibitor is a benzamide. In yet another aspect, the cell cycle inhibitor is a nicotinamide. These compounds have the basic structure of formula (XLIII):
- X is either O or S;
- A is commonly NH 2 or it can be OH or an alkoxy group;
- B is N or C-R 4 , where R 4 is H or an ether-linked hydroxylated alkane such as OCH 2 CH 2 OH, the alkane may be linear or branched and may contain one or more hydroxyl groups.
- B may be N-R 5 in which case the double bond in the ring involving B is a single bond.
- R 5 may be H, and alkyl or an aryl group (see, e.g., U.S. Patent No.
- R 2 is H, OR 6 , SR 6 or NHR 6 , where R 6 is an alkyl group; and R 3 is H, a lower alkyl, an ether linked lower alkyl such as -O-Me or -O-ethyl (see, e.g., U.S. Patent No. 5,215,738).
- Suitable benzamide compounds have the structures of formula (XLIV):
- Suitable nicotinamide compounds have the structures of formula (XLV):
- the cell cycle inhibitor is a halogenated sugar, such as mitolactol, or an analogue or derivative thereof, including mitobronitol and mannomustine.
- exemplary compounds have the structures: Mitolactol Mitobronitol Mannomustine
- the cell cycle inhibitor is a diazo compound, such as azaserine, or an analogue or derivative thereof, including 6-diazo-5-oxo-L-norleucine and 5-diazouracil (also a pyrimidine analog).
- exemplary compounds have the structures of formula (XLVI):
- Other compounds that may serve as cell cycle inhibitors according to the present invention are pazelliptine; wortmannin; metoclopramide; RSU; buthionine sulfoxime; tumeric; curcumin; AG337, a thymidylate synthase inhibitor; levamisole; lentinan, a polysaccharide; razoxane, an EDTA analogue; indomethacin; chlorpromazine; ⁇ and ⁇ interferon; MnBOPP; gadolinium texaphyrin; 4- amino-l,8-naphthalimide; staurosporine derivative of CGP; and SR-2508.
- the cell cycle inhibitor is a DNA alylating agent.
- the cell cycle inhibitor is an anti-microtubule agent.
- the cell cycle inhibitor is a topoisomerase inhibitor.
- the cell cycle inhibitor is a DNA cleaving agent.
- the cell cycle inhibitor is an antimetabolite.
- the cell cycle inhibitor functions by inhibiting adenosine deaminase ⁇ e.g., as a purine analogue).
- the cell cycle inhibitor functions by inhibiting purine ring synthesis and/or as a nucleotide interconversion inhibitor (e.g., as a purine analogue such as mercaptopurine).
- the cell cycle inhibitor functions by inhibiting dihydrofolate reduction and/or as a thymidine monophosphate block (e.g., methotrexate). In another aspect, the cell cycle inhibitor functions by causing DNA damage (e.g., bleomycin).
- a thymidine monophosphate block e.g., methotrexate
- the cell cycle inhibitor functions by causing DNA damage (e.g., bleomycin).
- the cell cycle inhibitor functions as a DNA intercalation agent and/or RNA synthesis inhibition (e.g., doxorubicin, aclarubicin, or detorubicin (acetic acid, diethoxy-, 2-[4-[(3 -amino-2,3 ,6-trideoxy-alpha-L-lyxo-hexopyranosyl)oxy]- 1 ,2,3 ,4,6, 1 1 -hexahydro-2,5, 12- trihydroxy-7-methoxy-6,l l-dioxo-2-naphthacenyl]-2-oxoethyl ester, (2S-cis)-)).
- doxorubicin e.g., doxorubicin, aclarubicin, or detorubicin (acetic acid, diethoxy-, 2-[4-[(3 -amino-2,3 ,6-trideoxy-alpha-L-lyxo-hexopyr
- the cell cycle inhibitor functions by inhibiting pyrimidine synthesis (e.g., N-phosphonoacetyl-L- aspartate). In another aspect, the cell cycle inhibitor functions by inhibiting ribonucleotides (e.g., hydroxyurea). In another aspect, the cell cycle inhibitor functions by inhibiting thymidine monophosphate (e.g., 5-fluorouracil). In another aspect, the cell cycle inhibitor functions by inhibiting DNA synthesis (e.g., cytarabine). In another aspect, the cell cycle inhibitor functions by causing DNA adduct formation (e.g., platinum compounds). In another aspect, the cell cycle inhibitor functions by inhibiting protein synthesis (e.g., L-asparginase).
- pyrimidine synthesis e.g., N-phosphonoacetyl-L- aspartate
- the cell cycle inhibitor functions by inhibiting ribonucleotides (e.g., hydroxyurea).
- the cell cycle inhibitor functions by inhibiting
- the cell cycle inhibitor functions by inhibiting microtubule function (e.g., taxanes).
- the cell cycle inhibitor acts at one or more of the steps in the biological pathway shown in FIG. 1.
- the cell-cycle inhibitor is camptothecin, mitoxantrone, etoposide, 5-fluorouracil, doxorubicin, methotrexate, peloruside A, mitomycin C, or a CDK-2 inhibitor or an analogue or derivative of any member of the class of listed compounds.
- the cell-cycle inhibitor is HTI-286, plicamycin; or mithramycin, or an analogue or derivative thereof.
- cell cycle inhibitors also include, e.g., 7-hexanoyltaxol (QP-2), cytochalasin A, lantrunculin D, actinomycin-D, Ro-31-7453 (3-(6-nitro-l-methyl-3-indolyl)-4-(l- methyl-3-indolyl)pyrrole-2,5-dione), PNU-151807, brostallicin, C2-ceramide, cytarabine ocfosfate (2(lH)-pyrimidinone, 4-amino-l-(5-0-(hydroxy(octadecyloxy)phosphinyl)- ⁇ -D-arabinofuranosyl)-, monosodium salt), paclitaxel (5B,20-epoxy-l,2 alpha,4,7B,10B,13 alpha-hexahydroxytax-1 l-en-9-one- 4, 10-diacetate-2-benzoate
- QP-2 7
- the pharmacologically active compound is a cyclin dependent protein kinase inhibitor (e.g., R-roscovitine, CYC-101, CYC-103, CYC-400, MX-7065, alvocidib (4H-l-Benzopyran-4-one, 2-(2-chlorophenyl)-5,7-dihydroxy-8-(3-hydroxy-l-methyl-4-piperidinyl)-, cis-(-)-), SU-9516, AG- 12275, PD-0166285, CGP-79807, fascaplysin, GW-8510 (benzenesulfonamide, 4-((Z)-(6,7-dihydro-7-oxo-8H-pyrrolo(2,3-g)benzothiazol-8- ylidene)methyl)amino)-N-(3-hydroxy-2,2-dimethylpropyl)-), GW-491619, Indirub, cyclin dependent protein kin
- the pharmacologically active compound is an EGF (epidermal growth factor) kinase inhibitor (e.g., erlotinib (4-quinazolinamine, N-(3-ethynylphenyl)-6,7-bis(2- methoxyethoxy)-, monohydrochloride), erbstatin, BIBX- 1382, gefitinib (4-quinazolinamine, N-(3- chloro-4-fluorophenyl)-7-methoxy-6-(3-(4-morpholinyl)propoxy)), or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- EGF epidermatitisin
- the pharmacologically active compound is an elastase inhibitor (e.g., ONO-6818, sivelestat sodium hydrate (glycine, N-(2-(((4-(2,2-di methyl- 1- oxopropoxy)phenyl)sulfonyl)amino)benzoyl)-), erdosteine (acetic acid, ((2-oxo-2-((tetrahydro-2-oxo- 3-thienyl)amino)ethyl)thio)-), MDL-100948A, MDL-104238 (N-(4-(4- morpholinylcarbonyl)benzoyl)-L-valyl-N'-(3 ,3 ,4,4,4-pentafluoro- 1 -( 1 -methylethyl)-2-oxobutyl)-L-2- azetamide), MDL-27324 (L-prolinamide
- the pharmacologically active compound is a factor Xa inhibitor (e.g., CY-222, fondaparinux sodium (alpha-D-glucopyranoside, methyl O-2-deoxy-6-O-sulfo-2- (sulfoamino)-alpha-D-glucopyranosyl-( 1 -4)-O- ⁇ -D-glucopyranuronosyl-( 1 -4)-O-2-deoxy-3 ,6-di-O- sulfo-2-(sulfoamino)-alpha-D-glucopyranosyl-( 1 -4)-O-2-O-sulfo-alpha-L-idopyranuronosyl-( 1 -4)-2- deoxy-2-(sulfoamino)-, 6-(hydrogen sulfate)), danaparoid sodium, or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- factor Xa inhibitor e.g., CY
- the pharmacologically active compound is a farnesyltransferase inhibitor (e.g., dichlorobenzoprim (2,4-diamino-5-(4-(3,4-dichlorobenzylamino)-3-nitrophenyl)-6- ethylpyrimidine), B-581, B-956 (N-(8(R)-amino-2(S)-benzyl-5(S)-isopropyl-9-sulfanyl-3(Z),6(E)- nonadienoyl)-L-methionine), OSI-754, perillyl alcohol (1-cyclohexene-l -methanol, 4-(l- methylethenyl)-, RPR-114334, lonafarnib (1-piperidinecarboxamide, 4-(2-(4-((l lR)-3,10-dibromo-8- chloro-6, 11 -dihydro-5H-
- the pharmacologically active compound is a fibrinogen antagonist (e.g., 2(S)-((p-toluenesulfonyl)amino)-3-(((5,6,7,8,-tetrahydro-4-oxo-5-(2-(piperidin-4-yl)ethyl)-4H- pyrazolo-(l,5-a)(l,4)diazepin-2-yl)carbonyl)-amino)propionic acid, streptokinase (kinase (enzyme- activating), strepto-), urokinase (kinase (enzyme-activating), uro-), plasminogen activator, - I l l -
- fibrinogen antagonist e.g., 2(S)-((p-toluenesulfonyl)amino)-3-(((5,6,7,8,-tetrahydro-4-oxo-5
- pamiteplase monteplase, heberkinase, anistreplase, alteplase, pro-urokinase, picotamide (1,3- benzenedicarboxamide, 4-methoxy-N,N'-bis(3-pyridinylmethyl)-), or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- the pharmacologically active compound is a guanylate cyclase stimulant (e.g., isosorbide-5-mononitrate (D-glucitol, l,4:3,6-dianhydro-, 5-nitrate), or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- a guanylate cyclase stimulant e.g., isosorbide-5-mononitrate (D-glucitol, l,4:3,6-dianhydro-, 5-nitrate), or an analogue or derivative thereof.
- the pharmacologically active compound is a heat shock protein 90 antagonist (e.g., geldanamycin; NSC-33050 (17-allylaminogeldanamycin; 17-AAG), rifabutin (rifamycin XIV, r,4-didehydro-l-deoxy-l,4-dihydro-5'-(2-methylpropyl)-l-oxo-), 17-DMAG, or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- a heat shock protein 90 antagonist e.g., geldanamycin; NSC-33050 (17-allylaminogeldanamycin; 17-AAG), rifabutin (rifamycin XIV, r,4-didehydro-l-deoxy-l,4-dihydro-5'-(2-methylpropyl)-l-oxo-), 17-DMAG, or an analogue or derivative thereof.
- the pharmacologically active compound is an HMGCoA reductase inhibitor (e.g., BCP-671, BB-476, fluvastatin (6-heptenoic acid, 7-(3-(4-fluorophenyl)-l-(l- methylethyl)-lH-indol-2-yl)-3,5-dihydroxy-, monosodium salt, (R*,S*-(E))-( ⁇ », dalvastatin (2H- pyran-2-one, 6-(2-(2-(2-(4-fluoro-3-methylphenyl)-4,4,6,6-tetramethyl- 1 -cyclohexen- 1 - yl)ethenyl)tetrahydro)-4-hydroxy-, (4alpha,6 ⁇ (E))-(+/-)-), glenvastatin (2H-pyran-2-one, 6-(2-(4-(4- fluoropheny
- fluvastatin 6-
- the pharmacologically active compound is a hydroorotate dehydrogenase inhibitor (e.g., leflunomide (4-isoxazolecarboxamide, 5-methyl-N-(4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl)-), laflunimus (2-propenamide, 2-cyano-3-cyclopropyl-3-hydroxy-N-(3- methyl-4(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)-, (Z)-), or atovaquone (1,4-naphthalenedione, 2-[4-(4- chlorophenyl)cyclohexyl]-3-hydroxy-, trans-, or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- hydroorotate dehydrogenase inhibitor e.g., leflunomide (4-isoxazolecarboxamide, 5-methyl-N-(4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl)-), laflunimus (2-propenamide, 2-cyano-3-cyclopropyl-3-hydroxy-N-(3-
- the pharmacologically active compound is an IKK2 inhibitor (e.g., MLN- 120B, SPC-839, or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- IKK2 inhibitor e.g., MLN- 120B, SPC-839, or an analogue or derivative thereof.
- the pharmacologically active compound is an IL-I, ICE or an IRAK antagonist (e.g., E-5090 (2-propenoic acid, 3-(5-ethyl-4-hydroxy-3-methoxy-l-naphthalenyl)- 2-methyl-, (Z)-), CH-164, CH-172, CH-490, AMG-719, iguratimod (N-(3-(formylamino)-4-oxo-6- phenoxy-4H-chromen-7-yl) methanesulfonamide), AV94-88, pralnacasan (6H-pyridazino( 1 ,2- a)( 1 ,2)diazepine- 1 -carboxamide, N-((2R,3 S)-2-ethoxytetrahydro-5-oxo-3-furanyl)octahydro-9-(( 1 - isoquinolinylcarbonyl)amino)
- E-5090 (2-
- the pharmacologically active compound is an IL-4 agonist (e.g., glatiramir acetate (L-glutamic acid, polymer with L-alanine, L-lysine and L-tyrosine, acetate (salt)), or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- an IL-4 agonist e.g., glatiramir acetate (L-glutamic acid, polymer with L-alanine, L-lysine and L-tyrosine, acetate (salt)
- an analogue or derivative thereof e.g., glatiramir acetate (L-glutamic acid, polymer with L-alanine, L-lysine and L-tyrosine, acetate (salt)
- the pharmacologically active compound is an immunomodulatory agent (e.g., biolimus, ABT-578, methylsulfamic acid 3-(2-methoxyphenoxy)-2- (((methylamino)sulfonyl)oxy)propyl ester, sirolimus (also referred to as rapamycin or RAPAMUNE (American Home Products, Inc., Madison, NJ)), CCI-779 (rapamycin 42-(3-hydroxy-2- (hydroxymethyl)-2-methylpropanoate)), LF- 15-0195, NPC 15669 (L-leucine, N-(((2,7-dimethyl-9H- fluoren-9-yl)methoxy)carbonyl)-), NPC-15670 (L-leucine, N-(((4,5-dimethyl-9H-fluoren-9- yl)methoxy)carbonyl)-), NPC-16570 (4-(2-(fluoren-9-yl)ethy
- an immunomodulatory agent
- bucillamine L-cysteine, N-(2-mercapto-2-methyl-l- oxopropyl)-
- amcinonide benzeneacetic acid, 2-amino-3 -benzoyl-, monosodium salt, monohydrate
- acemetacin lH-indole-3 -acetic acid, l-(4-chlorobenzoyl)-5-methoxy-2-methyl-, carboxymethyl ester, or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- analogues of rapamycin include tacrolimus and derivatives thereof (e.g., EP0184162B1 and U.S. Patent No. 6,258,823) everolimus and derivatives thereof (e.g., U.S. Patent No. 5,665,772). Further representative examples of sirolimus analogues and derivatives can be found in PCT Publication Nos.
- U.S. patents include U.S. Patent Nos. 6,342,507; 5,985,890; 5,604,234; 5,597,715; 5,583,139; 5,563,172; 5,561,228; 5,561,137; 5,541,193; 5,541,189; 5,534,632; 5,527,907; 5,484,799; 5,457,194; 5,457,182; 5,362,735; 5,324,644; 5,318,895; 5,310,903; 5,310,901; 5,258,389; 5,252,732; 5,247,076; 5,225,403; 5,221,625; 5,210,030; 5,208,241; 5,200,411 ; 5,198,421; 5,147,877; 5,140,018; 5,116,756; 5,109,112; 5,093,338; and 5,091,389.
- sirolimus, everolimus, and tacrolimus are provided below in Table 3:
- sirolimus analogues and derivatives include tacrolimus and derivatives thereof (e.g., EPO 184162Bl and U.S. Patent No. 6,258,823) everolimus and derivatives thereof (e.g., US Patent No. 5,665,772). Further representative examples of sirolimus analogues and derivatives include ABT-578 and others may be found in PCT Publication Nos.
- WO 97/10502 WO 96/41807, WO 96/35423, WO 96/03430, WO 9600282, WO 95/16691, WO 9515328, WO 95/07468, WO 95/04738, WO 95/04060, WO 94/25022, WO 94/21644, WO 94/18207, WO 94/10843, WO 94/09010, WO 94/04540, WO 94/02485, WO 94/02137, WO 94/02136, WO 93/25533, WO 93/18043, WO 93/13663, WO 93/11130, WO 93/10122, WO 93/04680, WO 92/14737, and WO 92/05179.
- U.S. patents include U.S. Patent Nos. 6,342,507; 5,985,890; 5,604,234; 5,597,715; 5,583,139; 5,563,172; 5,561,228; 5,561,137; 5,541,193; 5,541,189; 5,534,632; 5,527,907; 5,484,799; 5,457,194; 5,457,182; 5,362,735; 5,324,644; 5,318,895; 5,310,903; 5,310,901; 5,258,389; 5,252,732; 5,247,076; 5,225,403; 5,221,625; 5,210,030; 5,208,241, 5,200,411; 5,198,421; 5,147,877; 5,140,018; 5,1 16,756; 5,109,1 12; 5,093,338; and 5,091,389.
- the fibrosis-inhibiting agent may be, e.g., rapamycin (sirolimus), everolimus, biolimus, tresperimus, auranofin, 27-0-demethylrapamycin, tacrolimus, gusperimus, pimecrolimus, or ABT-578.
- the pharmacologically active compound is an inosine monophosphate dehydrogenase (IMPDH) inhibitor (e.g., mycophenolic acid, mycophenolate mofetil (4-hexenoic acid, 6-(l,3-dihydro-4-hydroxy-6-methoxy-7-methyl-3-oxo-5-isobenzofuranyl)-4- methyl-, 2-(4-morpholinyl)ethyl ester, (E)-), ribavirin (lH-l,2,4-triazole-3-carboxamide, 1- ⁇ -D- ribofuranosyl-), tiazofurin (4-thiazolecarboxamide, 2- ⁇ -D-ribofuranosyl-), viramidine, aminothiadiazole, thiophenfurin, tiazofurin) or an analogue or derivative thereof.
- IMPDH inosine monophosphate dehydrogenase
- the pharmacologically active compound is a leukotriene inhibitor (e.g., ONO-4057(benzenepropanoic acid, 2-(4-carboxybutoxy)-6-((6-(4-methoxyphenyl)-5- hexenyl)oxy)-, (E)-), ONO-LB-448, pirodomast l,8-naphthyridin-2(lH)-one, 4-hydroxy-l-phenyl-3- ( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)-, Sch-40120 (benzo(b)( 1 ,8)naphthyridin-5(7H)-one, 10-(3-chlorophenyl)-6,8,9, 1 O- tetrahydro-), L-656224 (4-benzofuranol, 7-chloro-2-((4-methoxyphenyl)methyl)-3-methyl-5-propyl-), MAFP (methyl arachidony
- the pharmacologically active compound is a MCP-I antagonist (e.g., nitronaproxen (2-napthaleneacetic acid, 6-methoxy-alpha-methyl 4-(nitrooxy)butyl ester (alpha S)-), bindarit (2-(l-benzylindazol-3-ylmethoxy)-2-methylpropanoic acid), l-alpha-25 dihydroxy vitamin D 3; or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- MCP-I antagonist e.g., nitronaproxen (2-napthaleneacetic acid, 6-methoxy-alpha-methyl 4-(nitrooxy)butyl ester (alpha S)-), bindarit (2-(l-benzylindazol-3-ylmethoxy)-2-methylpropanoic acid), l-alpha-25 dihydroxy vitamin D 3; or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- the pharmacologically active compound is a matrix metal loproteinase (MMP) inhibitor (e.g., D-9120, doxycycline (2-naphthacenecarboxamide, 4- (dimethylamino)- 1 ,4,4a,5,5a,6, 1 1,12a-octahydro-3,5, 10,12,12a-pentahydroxy-6-methyl- 1,11 -dioxo- (4S-(4 alpha, 4a alpha, 5 lpha, 5a alpha, 6 alpha, 12a alpha))-), BB-2827, BB-1101 (2S-allyl-Nl- hydroxy-3R-isobutyl-N4-(l S-methylcarbamoyl-2-phenylethyl)-succinamide), BB-2983, solimastat (N'-(2,2-dimethyl-l(S)-(N-(2-pyridyl)carbamo
- MMP matrix metal lo
- the pharmacologically active compound is a NF kappa B (NFKB) inhibitor (e.g., AVE-0545, Oxi-104 (benzamide, 4-amino-3-chloro-N-(2-(diethylamino)ethyl)-), dexlipotam, R-flurbiprofen ((l,l'-biphenyl)-4-acetic acid, 2-fluoro-alpha-methyl), SP100030 (2- chloro-N-(3,5-di(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)-4-(trifluoromethyl)pyrimidine-5-carboxamide), AVE-0545, Viatris, AVE-0547, Bay 11-7082, Bay 11-7085, 15 deoxy-prostaylandin J2, bortezomib (boronic acid, (( lR)-3-methyl- 1 -(((2S)- 1 -oxo-3-phenyl-2-
- NFKB NF
- the pharmacologically active compound is a NO antagonist (e.g., NCX-4016 (benzoic acid, 2-(acetyloxy)-, 3-((nitrooxy)methyl)phenyl ester, NCX-2216, L-arginine or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- NO antagonist e.g., NCX-4016 (benzoic acid, 2-(acetyloxy)-, 3-((nitrooxy)methyl)phenyl ester, NCX-2216, L-arginine or an analogue or derivative thereof.
- the pharmacologically active compound is a p38 MAP kinase inhibitor (e.g., GW-2286, CGP-5241 1, BIRB-798, SB220025, RO-320-1195, RWJ-67657, RWJ- 68354, SCIO-469, SCIO-323, AMG-548, CMC-146, SD-31 145, CC-8866, Ro-320-1 195, PD-98059 (4H-l-benzopyran-4-one, 2-(2-amino-3-methoxyphenyl)-), CGH-2466, doramapimod, SB-203580 (pyridine, 4-(5-(4-fluorophenyl)-2-(4-(methylsulfinyl)phenyl)- 1 H-imidazol-4-yl)-), SB-220025 ((5-(2- amino-4-pyrimidinyl)-4-(4-fluorophenyl)- 1 -(4-(4-MAP kina
- WO 00/63204A2 WO 01/21591A1; WO 01/35959A1; WO 01/7481 1A2; WO 02/18379A2; WO 2064594A2; WO 2083622A2; WO 2094842A2; WO 2096426A1; WO 2101015A2; WO 2103000A2; WO 3008413A1; WO 3016248A2; WO 3020715A1; WO 3024899A2; WO 3031431A1; WO3040103A1; WO 3053940A1; WO 3053941A2; WO 3063799A2; WO 3079986A2; WO 3080024A2; WO 3082287A1; WO 97/44467A1; WO 99/01449A1; and WO 99/58523A1.
- the pharmacologically active compound is a phosphodiesterase inhibitor (e.g., CDP-840 (pyridine, 4-((2R)-2-(3-(cyclopentyloxy)-4-methoxyphenyl)-2-phenylethyl)- ), CH-3697, CT-2820, D-22888 (imidazo(l,5-a)pyrido(3,2-e)pyrazin-6(5H)-one, 9-ethyl-2-methoxy- 7-methyl-5-propyl-), D-4418 (8-methoxyquinoline-5-(TSI-(2,5-dichloropyridin-3-yl))carboxamide), 1 - (3-cyclopentyloxy-4-methoxyphenyl)-2-(2,6-dichloro-4-pyridyl) ethanone oxime, D-4396, ONO- 6126, CDC-998, CDC-801, V-11294A
- CDP-840
- phosphodiesterase inhibitors include denbufylline (lH-purine-2,6-dione, l,3-dibutyl-3,7-dihydro-7-(2-oxopropyl)-), propentofylline (lH-purine-2,6-dione, 3,7-dihydro-3- methyl-l-(5-oxohexyl)-7-propyl-) and pelrinone (5-pyrimidinecarbonitrile, 1 ,4-dihydro-2-methyl-4- oxo-6-[(3-pyridinylmethyl)amino]-).
- phosphodiesterase III inhibitors include enoximone (2H-imidazol-2-one, l,3-dihydro-4-methyl-5-[4-(methylthio)benzoyl]-), and saterinone (3-pyridinecarbonitrile, 1,2- dihydro-5-[4-[2-hydroxy-3-[4-(2-methoxyphenyl)-l-piperazinyl]propoxy]phenyl]-6-methyl-2-oxo-).
- phosphodiesterase IV inhibitors include AWD-12-281, 3- auinol inecarboxylic acid, 1 -ethyl-6-fluoro- 1 ,4-dihydro-7-(4-methyl- 1 -piperazinyl)-4-oxo-), tadalafil
- vardenafil piperazine, 1 -(3-( 1 ,4- dihydro-5-methyl(-4-oxo-7-propylimidazo(5,l-f)(l,2,4)-triazin-2-yl)-4-ethoxyphenyl)sulfonyl)-4- ethyl-).
- the pharmacologically active compound is a TGF beta Inhibitor (e.g., mannose-6-phosphate, LF-984, tamoxifen (ethanamine, 2-(4-(l,2-diphenyl-l-butenyl)phenoxy)- N,N-dimethyl-, (Z)-), tranilast, or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- TGF beta Inhibitor e.g., mannose-6-phosphate, LF-984, tamoxifen (ethanamine, 2-(4-(l,2-diphenyl-l-butenyl)phenoxy)- N,N-dimethyl-, (Z)-), tranilast, or an analogue or derivative thereof.
- the pharmacologically active compound is a thromboxane A2 antagonist (e.g., CGS-22652 (3-pyridineheptanoic acid, ⁇ -(4-(((4-chlorophenyl)sulfonyl)amino)butyl)- , (.+-.)-), ozagrel (2-propenoic acid, 3-(4-(lH-imidazol-l-ylmethyl)phenyl)-, (E)-), argatroban (2- piperidinecarboxylic acid, l-(5-((aminoiminomethyl)amino)-l-oxo-2-(((l,2,3,4-tetrahydro-3-methyl- 8-quinolinyl)sulfonyl)amino)pentyl)-4-methyl-), ramatroban (9H-carbazole-9-propanoic acid, 3-(((4- fluoropheny
- CGS-22652
- the pharmacologically active compound is a tyrosine kinase inhibitor (e.g., SKI-606, ER-068224, SD-208, N-(6-benzothiazolyl)-4-(2-(l-piperazinyl)pyrid-5-yl)-2- pyrimidineamine, celastrol (24,25,26-trinoroleana-l(10),3,5,7-tetraen-29-oic acid, 3-hydroxy-9,13- dimethyl-2-oxo-, (9 beta.,13alpha,14 ⁇ ,20 alpha)-), CP-127374 (geldanamycin, 17-demethoxy-17-(2- propenylamino)-), CP-564959, PD-171026, CGP-5241 1 (lH-Isoindole-l,3(2H)-dione, 4,5- bis(phenylamino)-), CGP-53716 (benzamide,
- the pharmacologically active compound is a vitronectin inhibitor (e.g., O-(9,10-dimethoxy-l,2,3,4,5,6-hexahydro-4-((l,4,5,6-tetrahydro-2-pyrimidinyl)hydrazono)-8- benz(e)azulenyl)-N-((phenylrnethoxy)carbonyl)-DL-homoserine 2,3-dihydroxypropyl ester, (2S)- benzoylcarbonylamino-3-(2-((4S)-(3-(4,5-dihydro-lH-imidazol-2-ylamino)-propyl)-2,5-dioxo- imidazolidin-l-yl)-acetylamino)-propionate, Sch-221 153, S-836, SC-68448 ( ⁇ -((2-2-(((3- ((aminoiminomethyl)
- the pharmacologically active compound is a fibroblast growth factor inhibitor (e.g., CT-052923 (((2H-benzo(d)l,3-dioxalan-5-methyl)amino)(4-(6,7- dimethoxyquinazolin-4-yl)piperazinyl)methane-l-thione), or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- a fibroblast growth factor inhibitor e.g., CT-052923 (((2H-benzo(d)l,3-dioxalan-5-methyl)amino)(4-(6,7- dimethoxyquinazolin-4-yl)piperazinyl)methane-l-thione), or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- the pharmacologically active compound is a protein kinase inhibitor (e.g., KP-0201448, NPC15437 (hexanamide, 2,6-diamino-N-((l-(l-oxotridecyl)-2- piperidinyl)methyl)-), fasudil (lH-l,4-diazepine, hexahydro-l-(5-isoquinolinylsulfonyl)-), midostaurin (benzamide, N-(2,3,10,l l,12,13-hexahydro-10-methoxy-9-methyl-l-oxo-9,13-epoxy- lH,9H-diindolo(l,2,3-gh:3',2',r-lm)pyrrolo(3,4-j)(l,7)benzodiazonin-l l-yl)-N-methyl-, (9Alp
- the pharmacologically active compound is a PDGF receptor kinase inhibitor (e.g., RPR-127963E, or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- a PDGF receptor kinase inhibitor e.g., RPR-127963E, or an analogue or derivative thereof.
- the pharmacologically active compound is an endothelial growth factor receptor kinase inhibitor (e.g., CEP-7055, SU-0879 ((E)-3-(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl> 2-(aminothiocarbonyl)acrylonitrile), BIBF-1000, AG-013736 (CP-868596), AMG-706, AVE-0005, NM-3 (3-(2-methylcarboxymethyl)-6-methoxy-8-hydroxy-isocoumarin), Bay-43-9006, SU-Ol 1248,or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- endothelial growth factor receptor kinase inhibitor e.g., CEP-7055, SU-0879 ((E)-3-(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl> 2-(aminothiocarbonyl)acrylonitrile), BIBF-1000, AG-013736 (CP-868596), AMG
- the pharmacologically active compound is a retinoic acid receptor antagonist (e.g., etarotene (Ro-15-1570) (naphthalene, 6-(2-(4-(ethylsulfonyl)phenyl)-l- methylethenyl)- 1 ,2,3 ,4-tetrahydro- 1 , 1 ,4,4-tetramethyl-, (E)-), (2E,4E)-3 -methyl-5-(2-((E)-2-(2,6,6- trimethyl- 1 -cyclohexen- 1 -yl)ethenyl)- 1 -cyclohexen- 1 -yl)-2,4-pentadienoic acid, tocoretinate (retinoic acid, 3,4-dihydro-2,5,7,8-tetramethyl-2-(4,8,12-trimethyltridecyl)-2H-l-benzopyran-6-yl este
- the pharmacologically active compound is a platelet derived growth factor receptor kinase inhibitor (e.g., leflunomide (4-isoxazolecarboxamide, 5-methyl-N-(4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl)-, or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- a platelet derived growth factor receptor kinase inhibitor e.g., leflunomide (4-isoxazolecarboxamide, 5-methyl-N-(4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl)-, or an analogue or derivative thereof.
- the pharmacologically active compound is a fibrinogen antagonist (e.g., picotamide (1,3-benzenedicarboxamide, 4-methoxy-N,N'-bis(3-pyridinylmethyl)-, or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- a fibrinogen antagonist e.g., picotamide (1,3-benzenedicarboxamide, 4-methoxy-N,N'-bis(3-pyridinylmethyl)-, or an analogue or derivative thereof.
- the pharmacologically active compound is an antimycotic agent (e.g., miconazole, sulconizole, parthenolide, rosconitine, nystatin, isoconazole, fluconazole, ketoconasole, imidazole, itraconazole, terpinafine, elonazole, bifonazole, clotrimazole, conazole, terconazole (piperazine, 1 -(4-((2-(2,4-dich lorophenyl)-2-( 1 H- 1 ,2,4-triazol- 1 -ylmethy I)- 1 ,3 -dioxolan- 4-yl)methoxy)phenyl)-4-(l-methylethyl)-, cis-), isoconazole (l-(2-(2-6-dichlorobenzyloxy)-2-(2-,4- dichlorophenyl)
- the pharmacologically active compound is a bisphosphonate ⁇ e.g., clodronate, alendronate, pamidronate, zoledronate, or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- the pharmacologically active compound is a phospholipase Al inhibitor ⁇ e.g., ioteprednol etabonate (androsta-l ⁇ -diene-H-carboxylic acid, 17- ((ethoxycarbonyl)oxy)-l l-hydroxy-3-oxo-, chloromethyl ester, (1 IB, 17 alpha)-, or an analogue or derivative thereof)-
- ioteprednol etabonate androsta-l ⁇ -diene-H-carboxylic acid, 17- ((ethoxycarbonyl)oxy)-l l-hydroxy-3-oxo-, chloromethyl ester, (1 IB, 17 alpha)-, or an analogue or derivative thereof
- the pharmacologically active compound is a histamine Hl, H2, or H3 receptor antagonist ⁇ e.g., ranitidine (1 ,1-ethenediamine, N-(2-(((5-((dimethylamino)methyl)-2- furanyl)methyl)thio)ethyl)-N'-methyl-2-nitro-), niperotidine (N-(2-((5-)
- the pharmacologically active compound is a macrolide antibiotic (e.g., dirithromycin (erythromycin, 9-deoxo-l l-deoxy-9,1 l-(imino(2-(2- methoxyethoxy)ethylidene)oxy)-, (9S(R))-), flurithromycin ethylsuccinate (erythromycin, 8-fluoro- mono(ethyl butanedioate) (ester)-), erythromycin stinoprate (erythromycin, 2'-propanoate, compound with N-acetyl-L-cysteine (1:1)), clarithromycin (erythromycin, 6-O-methyl-), azithromycin (9-deoxo- 9a-aza-9a-methyl-9a-homoerythromycin-A), telithromycin (3-de((2,6-dideoxy-3-C-methyl-3-O- methyl-alpha-L-)
- the pharmacologically active compound is a GPIIb IHa receptor antagonist (e.g., tirofiban hydrochloride (L-tyrosine, N-(butylsulfonyl)-O-(4-(4-piperidinyl)butyl)-, monohydrochloride-), eptifibatide (L-cysteinamide, N6-(aminoiminomethyl)-N2-(3-mercapto-l- oxopropyl)-L-lysylglycyl-L-alpha-aspartyl-L-tryptophyl-L-prolyl-, cyclic( 1 ->6)-disulfide), xemilofiban hydrochloride, or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- a GPIIb IHa receptor antagonist e.g., tirofiban hydrochloride (L-tyrosine, N-(butylsulfonyl)-O-(
- the pharmacologically active compound is an endothelin receptor antagonist (e.g., bosentan (benzenesulfonamide, 4-(l,l-dimethylethyl)-N-(6-(2-hydroxyethoxy)-5-(2- methoxyphenoxy)(2,2'-bipyrimidin)-4-yl)-, or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- bosentan benzenesulfonamide, 4-(l,l-dimethylethyl)-N-(6-(2-hydroxyethoxy)-5-(2- methoxyphenoxy)(2,2'-bipyrimidin)-4-yl
- an analogue or derivative thereof e.g., bosentan (benzenesulfonamide, 4-(l,l-dimethylethyl)-N-(6-(2-hydroxyethoxy)-5-(2- methoxyphenoxy)(2,2'-bipyrimidin)-4-yl)-, or an ana
- the pharmacologically active compound is a peroxisome proliferator-activated receptor agonist (e.g., gemfibrozil (pentanoic acid, 5-(2,5-dimethylphenoxy)- 2,2-dimethyl-), fenof ⁇ brate (propanoic acid, 2-(4-(4-chlorobenzoyl)phenoxy)-2-methyl-, 1- methylethyl ester), ciprofibrate (propanoic acid, 2-(4-(2,2-dichlorocyclopropyl)phenoxy)-2-methyl-), rosiglitazone maleate (2,4-thiazolidinedione, 5-((4-(2-(methyl-2- pyridinylamino)ethoxy)phenyl)methyl)-, (Z)-2-butenedioate (1 :1)), pioglitazone hydro
- a peroxisome proliferator-activated receptor agonist e.g., gemfibrozil (pentanoi
- the pharmacologically active compound is a peroxisome proliferator- activated receptor alpha agonist, such as GW-590735, GSK-677954, GSK501516, pioglitazone hydrochloride (2,4-thiazolidinedione, 5-[[4-[2-(5-ethyl-2-pyridinyl)ethoxy]phenyl]rnethyl]-, monohydrochloride (+/-)-, or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- a peroxisome proliferator- activated receptor alpha agonist such as GW-590735, GSK-677954, GSK501516, pioglitazone hydrochloride (2,4-thiazolidinedione, 5-[[4-[2-(5-ethyl-2-pyridinyl)ethoxy]phenyl]rnethyl]-, monohydrochloride (+/-)-, or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- the pharmacologically active compound is an estrogen receptor agent (e.g., estradiol, 17- ⁇ -estradiol, or an analogue or derivative thereof)-
- an estrogen receptor agent e.g., estradiol, 17- ⁇ -estradiol, or an analogue or derivative thereof
- the pharmacologically active compound is a somatostatin analogue (e.g., angiopeptin, or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- a somatostatin analogue e.g., angiopeptin, or an analogue or derivative thereof.
- the pharmacologically active compound is a neurokinin 1 antagonist (e.g., GW-597599, lanepitant ((l,4'-bipiperidine)-r-acetamide, N-(2-(acetyl((2- methoxyphenyl)methyl)amino)-l-(lH-indol-3-ylmethyl)ethyl)- (R)-), nolpitantium chloride (1- azoniabicyclo[2.2.2]octane, l-[2-[3-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-l-[[3-(l-methylethoxy)phenyl]acetyl]-3- piperidinyl]ethyl]-4-phenyl-, chloride, (S)-), or saredutant (benzamide, N-[4-[4-(acetylamino)-4- phenyl-l-piperidinyl]-2-
- the pharmacologically active compound is a neurokinin 3 antagonist (e.g., talnetant (4-quinolinecarboxamide, 3-hydroxy-2-phenyl-N-[(lS)-l-phenylpropyl]-, or an analogue or derivative thereof)-
- talnetant 4-quinolinecarboxamide, 3-hydroxy-2-phenyl-N-[(lS)-l-phenylpropyl]-, or an analogue or derivative thereof
- the pharmacologically active compound is a neurokinin antagonist (e.g., GSK-679769, GSK-823296, SR-489686 (benzamide, N-[4-[4-(acetylamino)-4-phenyl-l- piperidinyl]-2-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)butyl]-N-methyl-, (S)-), SB-223412; SB-235375 (4- quinolinecarboxamide, 3-hydroxy-2-phenyl-N-[(lS)-l-phenylpropyl]-), UK-226471, or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- a neurokinin antagonist e.g., GSK-679769, GSK-823296, SR-489686 (benzamide, N-[4-[4-(acetylamino)-4-phenyl-l- piperidinyl]-2-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)butyl]-N-methyl-, (
- the pharmacologically active compound is a VLA-4 antagonist (e.g., GSK683699, or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- the pharmacologically active compound is a osteoclast inhibitor (e.g., ibandronic acid (phosphonic acid, [l-hydroxy-3-(methylpentylamino)propylidene] bis-), alendronate sodium, or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- a osteoclast inhibitor e.g., ibandronic acid (phosphonic acid, [l-hydroxy-3-(methylpentylamino)propylidene] bis-), alendronate sodium, or an analogue or derivative thereof.
- the pharmacologically active compound is a DNA topoisomerase ATP hydrolysing inhibitor (e.g., enoxacin (l ⁇ -naphthyridine ⁇ -carboxylic acid, l-ethyl-6-fluoro-l,4- dihydro-4-oxo-7-( 1 -piperazinyl)-), levofloxacin (7H-Pyrido[ 1 ,2,3-de]- 1 ,4-benzoxazine-6-carboxylic acid, 9-fluoro-2,3-dihydro-3-methyl-10-(4-methyl-l-piperazinyl)-7-oxo-, (S)-), ofloxacin (7H- pyrido[l,2,3-de]-l,4-benzoxazine-6-carboxylic acid, 9-fluoro-2,3-dihydro-3-methyl-10-(4-methyl-l- piperaziny
- enoxacin
- the pharmacologically active compound is an angiotensin I converting enzyme inhibitor (e.g., ramipril (cyclopenta[b]pyrrole-2-carboxylic acid, l-[2-[[l- (ethoxycarbonyl)-3-phenylpropyl]amino]-l-oxopropyl]octahydro-, [2S-[1 [R*(R*)],2 alpha, 3a ⁇ , 6aB]]-), trandolapril (lH-indole-2-carboxylic acid, l-[2-[(l-carboxy-3-phenylpropyl)amino]-l- oxopropyl]octahydro-, [2S-[1 [R*(R*)],2 alpha,3a alpha,7a ⁇ ]]-), fasidotril (L-alanine, N-[(2S)
- the pharmacologically active compound is an angiotensin II antagonist (e.g., HR-720 (lH-imidazole-5-carboxylic acid, 2-butyl-4-(methylthio)-l-[[2'- [[[(propylamino)carbonyl]amino]sulfonyl][l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl]methyl]-, dipotassium salt, or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- angiotensin II antagonist e.g., HR-720 (lH-imidazole-5-carboxylic acid, 2-butyl-4-(methylthio)-l-[[2'- [[[(propylamino)carbonyl]amino]sulfonyl][l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl]methyl]-, dipotassium salt, or an analogue or derivative thereof.
- the pharmacologically active compound is an enkephalinase inhibitor (e.g., Aventis 100240 (pyrido[2,l-a][2]benzazepine-4-carboxylic acid, 7-[[2-(acetylthio)-l- oxo-3-phenylpropyl]amino]-l,2,3,4,6,7,8,12b-octahydro-6-oxo-, [4S-[4 alpha, 7 alpha(R*),12b ⁇ ]]-), AVE-7688, or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- Aventis 100240 pyrido[2,l-a][2]benzazepine-4-carboxylic acid, 7-[[2-(acetylthio)-l- oxo-3-phenylpropyl]amino]-l,2,3,4,6,7,8,12b-octahydro-6-oxo-, [4S-[4 alpha
- the pharmacologically active compound is peroxisome proliferator-activated receptor gamma agonist insulin sensitizer (e.g., rosiglitazone maleate (2,4- thiazolidinedione, 5-((4-(2-(methyl-2-pyridinylamino)ethoxy)phenyl)methyl)-, (Z)-2-butenedioate (1 : 1), farglitazar (GI-262570, GW-2570, GW-3995, GW-5393, GW-9765), LY-929, LY-519818, LY- 674, or LSN-862), or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- peroxisome proliferator-activated receptor gamma agonist insulin sensitizer e.g., rosiglitazone maleate (2,4- thiazolidinedione, 5-((4-(2-(methyl-2-pyridinylamino)ethoxy)phenyl)methyl)-, (Z
- the pharmacologically active compound is a protein kinase C inhibitor, such as ruboxistaurin mesylate (9H,18H-5,21 : 12,17-dimethenodibenzo(e,k)pyrrolo(3,4- h)( 1 ,4, 13)oxadiazacyclohexadecine- 18,20( 19H)-dione,9-((dimethylamino)methyl)-6,7, 10,11- tetrahydro-, (S)-), safingol (1,3-octadecanediol, 2-amino-, [S-(R*,R*)]-), or enzastaurin hydrochloride ( lH-pyrole-2,5-dione, 3-( 1 -methyl- 1 H-indol-3-yl)-4-[ 1 -[ 1 -(2-pyridinylmethyl)-4-piperidinyl]- 1
- the pharmacologically active compound is a ROCK (rho- associated kinase) inhibitor, such as Y-27632, HA-1077, H-1152 and 4-l-(aminoalkyl)-N-(4-pyridyl) cyclohexanecarboxamide or an analogue or derivative thereof.
- ROCK rho- associated kinase
- the pharmacologically active compound is a CXCR3 inhibitor such as T-487, T0906487 or analogue or derivative thereof.
- the pharmacologically active compound is an Itk inhibitor such as BMS-509744 or an analogue or derivative thereof.
- the pharmacologically active compound is a cytosolic phospholipase A 2 -alpha inhibitor such as efipladib (PLA-902) or analogue or derivative thereof.
- a cytosolic phospholipase A 2 -alpha inhibitor such as efipladib (PLA-902) or analogue or derivative thereof.
- the pharmacologically active compound is a PPAR Agonist ⁇ e.g., Metabolex ((-)-benzeneacetic acid, 4-chloro-alpha-[3-(trifIuoromethyl)-phenoxy]-, 2- (acetylamino)ethyl ester), balaglitazone (5-(4-(3-methyl-4-oxo-3,4-dihydro-quinazoiin-2-yl- methoxy)-benzyl)-thiazolidine-2,4-dione), ciglitazone (2,4-thiazolidinedione, 5-[[4-[(l- methylcyclohexyl)methoxy]phenyl]methyl]-), DRF-10945, farglitazar, GSK-677954, GW-409544, GW-501516, GW-590735, GW-590735, K-H l, KRP-101,
- the pharmacologically active compound is an immunosuppressant (e.g., batebulast (cyclohexanecarboxylic acid, 4-[[(aminoirninomethyl)amino]methyl]-, 4-(l,l- dimethylethyOphenyl ester, trans-), cyclomunine, exalamide (benzamide, 2-(hexyloxy)-), LYN-001, CCI-779 (rapamycin 42-(3-hydroxy-2-(hydroxymethyl)-2-methylpropanoate)), 1726; 1726-D; AVE- 1726, or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- an immunosuppressant e.g., batebulast (cyclohexanecarboxylic acid, 4-[[(aminoirninomethyl)amino]methyl]-, 4-(l,l- dimethylethyOphenyl ester, trans-), cyclomunine, exalamide (benzamide, 2-(hexyloxy
- the pharmacologically active compound is an Erb inhibitor (e.g., canertinib dihydrochloride (N-[4-(3-(chloro-4-fluoro-phenylamino)-7-(3-mo ⁇ holin-4-yl-propoxy)- quinazolin-6-yl]-acrylamide dihydrochloride), CP-724714, or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- Erb inhibitor e.g., canertinib dihydrochloride (N-[4-(3-(chloro-4-fluoro-phenylamino)-7-(3-mo ⁇ holin-4-yl-propoxy)- quinazolin-6-yl]-acrylamide dihydrochloride), CP-724714, or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- the pharmacologically active compound is an apoptosis agonist (e.g., CEFLATONIN (CGX-635) (from Chemgenex Therapeutics, Inc., Menlo Park, CA), CHML, LBH-589, metoclopramide (benzamide, 4-amino-5-chloro-N-[2-(diethylamino)ethyl]-2-methoxy-), patupilone (4,17-dioxabicyclo(14.1.0)heptadecane-5,9-dione, 7,1 l-dihydroxy-8,8,10,12,16- pentamethyl-3-(l-methyl-2-(2-methyl-4-thiazolyl)ethenyl, (1 R,3S,7S,1OR,1 1S,12S,16R)), AN-9; pivanex (butanoic acid, (2,2-dimethyl-l-oxopropoxy)methyl ester), SL-100;
- CEFLATONIN
- the pharmacologically active compound is an lipocortin agonist (e.g., CGP-13774 (9Alpha-chloro-6Alpha-fluoro-l l ⁇ ,17alpha-dihydroxy-16Alpha-methyl-3-oxo-l,4- androstadiene-17 ⁇ -carboxylic acid-methylester-17-propionate), or analogue or derivative thereof).
- CGP-13774 (9Alpha-chloro-6Alpha-fluoro-l l ⁇ ,17alpha-dihydroxy-16Alpha-methyl-3-oxo-l,4- androstadiene-17 ⁇ -carboxylic acid-methylester-17-propionate
- the pharmacologically active compound is a VCAM-I antagonist (e.g., DW-908e, or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- the pharmacologically active compound is a collagen antagonist (e.g., E-5050 (Benzenepropanamide, 4-(2,6-dimethylheptyl)-N-(2-hydroxyethyl)- ⁇ -methyl-), lufironil (2,4-Pyridinedicarboxamide, N,N'-bis(2-methoxyethyl)-), or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- E-5050 Benzenepropanamide, 4-(2,6-dimethylheptyl)-N-(2-hydroxyethyl)- ⁇ -methyl-
- the pharmacologically active compound is an alpha 2 integrin antagonist (e.g., E-7820, or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- the pharmacologically active compound is a TNF alpha inhibitor (e.g., ethyl pyruvate, Genz-29155, lentinan (Ajinomoto Co., Inc. (Japan)), linomide (3- quinolinecarboxamide, l,2-dihydro-4-hydroxy-N,l-dimethyl-2-oxo-N-phenyl-), UR- 1505, or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- TNF alpha inhibitor e.g., ethyl pyruvate, Genz-29155, lentinan (Ajinomoto Co., Inc. (Japan)
- linomide 3- quinolinecarboxamide, l,2-dihydro-4-hydroxy-N,l-dimethyl-2-oxo-N-phenyl-
- the pharmacologically active compound is a nitric oxide inhibitor (e.g., guanidioethyldisulfide, or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- a nitric oxide inhibitor e.g., guanidioethyldisulfide, or an analogue or derivative thereof.
- the pharmacologically active compound is a cathepsin inhibitor (e.g., SB-462795 or an analogue or derivative thereof)-
- compositions of the invention can also be used to deliver various types of living cells or genes to a desired site of administration in order to form new tissue.
- the term "genes" as used herein is intended to encompass genetic material from natural sources, synthetic nucleic acids, DNA, antisense-DNA and RNA.
- this aspect of the invention is a method for delivering living cells or genes, where the composition also includes the cells of genes to be delivered, and steps (a) and (b) are as described for the method of sealing tissue. Step (c) would involve allowing a three-dimensional matrix to form and delivering the cells or genes.
- mesenchymal stem cells can be delivered to produce cells of the same type as the tissue into which they are delivered.
- Mesenchymal stem cells are not differentiated and therefore can differentiate to form various types of new cells due to the presence of an active agent or the effects (chemical, physical, etc.) of the local tissue environment.
- mesenchymal stem cells include osteoblasts, chondrocytes, and fibroblasts.
- Osteoblasts can be delivered to the site of a bone defect to produce new bone; chondrocytes can be delivered to the site of a cartilage defect to produce new cartilage; fibroblasts can be delivered to produce collagen wherever new connective tissue is needed; neurectodermal cells can be delivered to form new nerve tissue; epithelial cells can be delivered to form new epithelial tissues, such as liver, pancreas, etc.
- the cells or genes may be either allogeneic or xenogeneic in origin.
- the compositions can be used to deliver cells or genes from other species that have been genetically modified. Because the composition of the invention is not easily degraded in vivo, cells and genes entrapped within the three-dimensional matrix will be isolated from the patient's own cells and, as such, will not provoke an immune response in the patient. In order to entrap the cells or genes within this matrix, the cells or genes are pre-mixed with the components in an initial environment. Upon exposure to the aqueous environment, a three-dimensional matrix is formed, thereby entrapping the cells or genes within the matrix. As discussed above for biologically active agents, when used to deliver cells or genes, the components may also contain biodegradable groups, or the composition may also contain biodegradable compounds, to aid in controlled release of the cells or genes at the intended site of delivery.
- bioadhesive As used herein, the terms “bioadhesive,” “biological adhesive,” and “surgical adhesive” are used interchangeably to refer to biocompatible compositions capable of effecting temporary or permanent attachment between the surfaces of two native tissues, or between a native tissue surface and either a non-native tissue surface or a surface of a synthetic implant.
- the composition of the invention is applied to a first surface, which is then contacted with a second surface to effect adhesion therebetween.
- the composition is exposed to the aqueous environment to initiate reaction among the reactive groups, then delivered to the first surface before substantial reaction has occurred.
- the first surface is then contacted with the second surface, preferably immediately, to effect adhesion.
- another embodiment of the invention is a method of bioadhesion between two surfaces, where steps (a) and (b) are as described for the method of sealing tissue, and step (c) involves allowing a three-dimensional matrix to form and adhere the surfaces.
- the two surfaces may be held together manually, or using other appropriate means, while the reaction is proceeding to completion. Reaction is typically sufficiently complete for adhesion to occur within about 5 to 60 minutes after exposure of the composition to the aqueous environment; however, the time required for complete reaction to occur is dependent on a number of factors, including the type and molecular weight of each reactive component, the degree of functionalization, and the concentration of the components (i.e., higher concentrations result in faster reaction times). [0455] At least one of the first and second surfaces is preferably a native tissue surface.
- the term "native tissue” refers to biological tissues that are native to the body of the patient being treated, and is intended to include biological tissues that have been elevated or removed from one part of the body of a patient for implantation to another part of the body of the same patient (such as bone autografts, skin flap autografts, etc.).
- the compositions of the invention can be used to adhere a piece of skin from one part of a patient's body to another part of the body, as in the case of a burn victim.
- the other surface may be a native tissue surface, a non-native tissue surface, or a surface of a synthetic implant.
- non-native tissue refers to biological tissues that have been removed from the body of a donor patient (who may be of the same species or of a different species than the recipient patient) for implantation into the body of a recipient patient (e.g., tissue and organ transplants).
- the compositions of the invention can be used to adhere a donor cornea to the eye of a recipient patient.
- the term “synthetic implant” refers to any biocompatible material intended for implantation into the body of a patient not encompassed by the above definitions for native tissue and non-native tissue. Synthetic implants include, for example, artificial blood vessels, heart valves, artificial organs, bone prostheses, implantable lenticules, vascular grafts, stents, and stent/graft combinations, etc.
- compositions of the invention are particularly well suited for use in ophthalmic applications. See for example, Margalit et al. (2000) "Bioadhesives for Intraocular Use" Retina 20:469-477.
- a synthetic lenticule for correction of vision can be attached to the Bowman's layer of the cornea of a patient's eye using the methods of the present invention.
- the compositions can be molded into a desired lenticular shape, either during or after formation of the three-dimensional matrix.
- the resulting collagen lenticule can then be attached to the Bowman's layer of a de-epithelialized cornea of a patient's eye using the methods of the present invention.
- reactive groups e.g., electrophilic groups
- the composition can be applied first to the posterior surface of the lenticule, which is then contacted with the anterior surface of the cornea.
- another embodiment of the invention is a method of ophthalmic repair of the cornea, where steps (a) and (b) are as described for the method of sealing tissue, and step (c) involves allowing a three-dimensional matrix to form and adhering a lenticule to the cornea.
- compositions of the present invention are also suitable for use in vitreous replacement.
- compositions of the present invention may be used for the delivery of active agents.
- compositions of the invention can also be used for augmentation of soft or hard tissue within the body of a mammalian subject. As such, they may be better than currently marketed collagen-based materials for soft tissue augmentation, because they are less immunogenic and more persistent.
- soft tissue augmentation applications include sphincter (e.g. , urinary, anal, esophageal) augmentation and the treatment of rhytids and scars.
- Examples of hard tissue augmentation applications include the repair and/or replacement of bone and/or cartilaginous tissue.
- another embodiment of the invention is a method of tissue augmentation for a pre-selected site, where steps (a) and (b) are as described for the method of sealing tissue, and step (c) involves allowing a three-dimensional matrix to form at the pre-selected site.
- compositions are particularly suited for use as a replacement material for synovial fluid in osteoarthritic joints, serving to reduce joint pain and improve joint function by restoring a soft hydrogel network in the joint.
- the compositions can also be used as a replacement material for the nucleus pulposus of a damaged intervertebral disk. The nucleus pulposus of the damaged disk is first removed, and the composition is then injected or otherwise introduced into the center of the disk. The composition may either be exposed to the aqueous environment prior to introduction into the disk, or allowed to inter-react in situ.
- the composition is injected simultaneously with exposure to the aqueous environment, to a tissue site in need of augmentation through a small-gauge (e.g., 25-32 gauge) needle.
- a small-gauge e.g. 25-32 gauge
- the reactive groups on the components inter-react with each other to form a three- dimensional matrix in situ.
- the reactive groups on the components can react with body tissue to further enhance tissue augmentation.
- some of the reactive electrophilic groups may also react with primary amino groups on lysine residues of collagen molecules within the patient's own tissue, providing for "biological anchoring" of the composition with the host tissue.
- compositions of the invention are to coat tissues in order to prevent the formation of adhesions following surgery or injury to internal tissues or organs.
- Surgical adhesions are abnormal, fibrous bands of scar tissue that can form inside the body as a result of the healing process that follows any open or minimally invasive surgical procedure including abdominal, gynecologic, cardiothoracic, spinal, plastic, vascular, ENT, ophthalmologic, urologic, neuro, or orthopedic surgery.
- Surgical adhesions are typically connective tissue structures that form between adjacent injured areas within the body. Briefly, localized areas of injury trigger an inflammatory and healing response that culminates in healing and scar tissue formation.
- Adhesions can range from flimsy, easily separable structures to dense, tenacious fibrous structures that can only be separated by surgical dissection. While many adhesions are benign, some can cause significant clinical problems and are a leading cause of repeat surgical intervention.
- Adhesions can be triggered by surgical trauma such as cutting, manipulation, retraction or suturing, as well as from inflammation, infection (e.g., fungal or mycobacterium), bleeding or the presence of a foreign body.
- surgical trauma may also result from tissue drying, ischemia, or thermal injury.
- an implanted device can trigger a "foreign body” response where the immune system recognizes the implant as foreign and triggers an inflammatory reaction that ultimately leads to scar tissue formation.
- a specific form of foreign body reaction in response to medical device placement is complete enclosure ("walling off) of the implant in a capsule of scar tissue (encapsulation). Fibrous encapsulation of implanted devices and implants can complicate any procedure, but breast augmentation and reconstruction surgery, joint replacement surgery, hernia repair surgery, artificial vascular graft surgery, stent placement, and neurosurgery are particularly prone to this complication.
- the implant becomes encapsulated by a fibrous connective tissue capsule which compromises or impairs the function of the surgical implant (e.g., breast implant, artificial joint, surgical mesh, vascular graft, stent or dural patch).
- the surgical implant e.g., breast implant, artificial joint, surgical mesh, vascular graft, stent or dural patch.
- Adhesions generally begin to form within the first several days after surgery. Generally, adhesion formation is an inflammatory reaction in which factors are released, increasing vascular permeability and resulting in fibrinogen influx and fibrin deposition. This deposition forms a protein matrix that bridges the abutting tissues. Fibroblasts accumulate, attach to the protein matrix, deposit collagen and induce angiogenesis. If this cascade of events can be prevented within 4 to 5 days following surgery, then adhesion formation may be inhibited.
- compositions of the invention may be used to prevent adhesion formation in a wide variety of surgical procedures including spinal and neurosurgical procedures (e.g., open surgical resection of a ruptured lumbar disc or entrapped spinal nerve root (laminectomy); disectomies; and microlumbar disc excision (microdiscectomy)); gynecological surgical procedures (e.g., hysterectomy, myomectomy, endometriosis, infertility, birth control (e.g., tubal ligation), reversal of sterilization, pain, dysmennorrhea, dysfunctional uterine bleeding, ectopic pregnancy, ovarian cysts, and gynecologic malignancies); abdominal surgical procedures (e.g., hernia repair (abdominal, ventral, inguinal, incisional), bowel obstruction, inflammatory bowel disease (ulcerative colitis, Crohn's disease), appendectomy, trauma (penetrating wounds, blunt trauma),
- compositions may be include and/or release a therapeutic agent able to reduce scarring (i.e., a fibrosis-inhibiting agent) at a surgical site, such as to prevent or inhibit the formation of post-operative adhesions.
- a therapeutic agent able to reduce scarring i.e., a fibrosis-inhibiting agent
- compositions for the prevention of surgical adhesions may include or be adapted to release an agent that inhibits one or more of the five general components of the process of fibrosis (or scarring), including: inflammatory response and inflammation, migration and proliferation of connective tissue cells (such as fibroblasts or smooth muscle cells), formation of new blood vessels (angiogenesis), deposition of extracellular matrix (ECM), and remodeling (maturation and organization of the fibrous tissue).
- fibrosis-inhibiting agents that may be combined with the present compositions to prevent the formation of adhesions include the following: cell cycle inhibitors including (A) anthracyclines (e.g., doxorubicin and mitoxantrone), (B) taxanes (e.g., paclitaxel, TAXOTERE and docetaxel), and (C) podophyllotoxins (e.g., etoposide); (D) immunomodulators (e.g., sirolimus, everolimus, tacrolimus); (E) heat shock protein 90 antagonists (e.g., geldanamycin, 17- AAG, 17- DMAG); (F) HMGCoA reductase inhibitors (e.g., simvastatin); (G) inosine monophosphate dehydrogenase inhibitors (e.g., mycophenolic acid, l-alpha-25 dihydroxy vitamin D 3 ); (H) NF
- the drug dose administered from the present compositions for surgical adhesion prevention will depend on a variety of factors, including the type of formulation, the location of the treatment site, and the type of condition being treated; however, certain principles can be applied in the application of this art.
- Drug dose can be calculated as a function of dose per unit area (of the treatment site), total drug dose administered can be measured and appropriate surface concentrations of active drug can be determined. Drugs are to be used at concentrations that range from several times more than to 50%, 20%, 10%, 5%, or even less than 1% of the concentration typically used in a single systemic dose application.
- the anti-scarring agent is released from the polymer composition in effective concentrations in a time period that may be measured from the time of infiltration into tissue adjacent to the device, which ranges from about less than 1 day to about 180 days. Generally, the release time may also be from about less than 1 day to about 180 days; from about 7 days to about 14 days; from about 14 days to about 28 days; from about 28 days to about 56 days; from about 56 days to about 90 days; from about 90 days to about 180 days.
- the drug is released in effective concentrations for a period ranging from 1 - 90 days.
- the total amount (dose) of anti-scarring agent in the composition can be in the range of about 0.01 ⁇ g-10 ⁇ g, or 10 ⁇ g-10 mg, or 10 mg-250 mg, or 250 mg-1000 mg, or 1000 mg-2500 mg.
- the dose (amount) of anti-scarring agent per unit area of surface to which the agent is applied may be in the range of about 0.01 ⁇ g/mm 2 - 1 ⁇ g/mm 2 , or 1 ⁇ g/mm 2 - 10 ⁇ g/mm 2 , or 10 ⁇ g/mm 2 - 250 ⁇ g/mm 2 , 250 ⁇ g/mm 2 - 1000 ⁇ g/mm 2 , or 1000 ⁇ g/mm 2 - 2500 ⁇ g/mm 2 .
- compositions for treating or preventing surgical adhesions are exemplary dosage ranges for various anti-scarring agents that can be used in conjunction with compositions for treating or preventing surgical adhesions in accordance with the invention.
- A Cell cycle inhibitors including doxorubicin and mitoxantrone.
- Doxorubicin analogues and derivatives thereof total dose not to exceed 25 mg (range of 0.1 ⁇ g to 25 mg); preferred 1 ⁇ g to 5 mg.
- Dose per unit area 0.01 ⁇ g - 100 ⁇ g per mm 2 ; preferred dose of 0.1 ⁇ g/mm 2 - 10 ⁇ g/mm 2 .
- Mitoxantrone and analogues and derivatives thereof total dose not to exceed 5 mg (range of 0.01 ⁇ g to 5 mg); preferred 0.1 ⁇ g to 1 mg.
- Cell cycle inhibitors such as podophyllotoxins (e.g., etoposide): total dose not to exceed 10 mg (range of 0.1 ⁇ g to 10 mg); preferred 1 ⁇ g to 3 mg. Dose per unit area of 0.1 ⁇ g
- Sirolimus i.e., rapamycin, RAPAMUNE
- total dose not to exceed 10 mg (range of 0.1 ⁇ g to 10 mg); preferred 10 ⁇ g to 1 mg.
- Everolimus and derivatives and analogues thereof total dose should not exceed 10 mg (range of 0.1 ⁇ g to 10 mg); preferred 10 ⁇ g to 1 mg.
- HMGCoA reductase inhibitors e.g., simvastatin
- analogues and derivatives thereof total dose not to exceed 2000 mg (range of 10.0 ⁇ g to 2000 mg); preferred 10 ⁇ g to 300 mg.
- Inosine monophosphate dehydrogenase inhibitors e.g., mycophenolic acid, l-alpha-25 dihydroxy vitamin D3 and analogues and derivatives thereof: total dose not to exceed 2000 mg (range of 10.0 ⁇ g to 2000 mg); preferred 10 ⁇ g to 300 mg.
- NF kappa B inhibitors e.g., Bay 1 1-7082
- analogues and derivatives thereof total dose not to exceed 200 mg (range of 1.0 ⁇ g to 200 mg); preferred 1 ⁇ g to 50 mg.
- Antimycotic agents e.g., sulconizole
- analogues and derivatives thereof total dose not to exceed 2000 mg (range of 10.0 ⁇ g to 2000 mg); preferred 10 ⁇ g to 300 mg.
- the composition is exposed to the aqueous environment and a thin layer of the composition is then applied to the tissues comprising, surrounding, and/or adjacent to the surgical site before substantial reaction has occurred.
- Application of the composition to the tissue site may be by extrusion, brushing, spraying (as described above), or by any other convenient means.
- the invention also relates to a method of preventing adhesions between tissues of a patient, where steps (a) and (b) are as described for the method of sealing tissue, and step (c) involves allowing a three- dimensional matrix to form on the tissue, and thus prevent tissue adhesion.
- compositions that achieve complete inter-reaction within a relatively short period of time i.e., 5-15 minutes following exposure of the multifunctional compounds to the modified environment
- Certain surgical procedures may involve placement of a medical device or implant at the surgical site, in which case it may be desirable to apply the composition (with or without a therapeutic agent) to the surface of the implant, to the implant-tissue interface, and/or to tissue in the vicinity of the implanted device to minimize the formation of post-operative surgical adhesions, unwanted scarring in the vicinity of the implant, and encapsulation of the implant by a fibrous connective tissue capsule.
- compositions alone or loaded with a therapeutic agent may be applied to the tissue surface at a spinal or neurosurgical site or to the surface of an implanted device (e.g., dural patches, spinal prostheses, artificial disc, rods, bone fixation devices (e.g., anchoring plates and bone screws), injectable filling or bulking agents for discs, spinal grafts, spinal nucleus implants, intervertebral disc spacers, fusion cages, or to implants placed in the brain, such as drains, shunts, drug-delivery pumps, or neurostimulation devices) and/or the tissue surrounding the implant before, during, or after the surgical procedure.
- a therapeutic agent e.g., a fibrosis-inhibiting agent
- compositions alone or loaded with a therapeutic agent may be applied during open or endoscopic gynecological surgery to the tissue surface of the pelvic side wall, adnexa, uterus and any adjacent affected tissues during the surgical procedure or to the surface of an implanted device or implant (e.g., genital-urinary stents, bulking agents, sterilization devices (e.g., valves, clips and clamps), and tubal occlusion implants and plugs) and/or the tissue surrounding the implant before, during, or after the surgical procedure.
- a therapeutic agent e.g., a fibrosis-inhibiting agent
- an implanted device or implant e.g., genital-urinary stents, bulking agents, sterilization devices (e.g., valves, clips and clamps), and tubal occlusion implants and plugs
- compositions alone or loaded with a therapeutic agent may be applied during open, endoscopic, or laparoscopic abdominal surgery to the tissue surface of the peritoneal cavity, visceral peritoneum, abdominal organs, abdominal wall and any adjacent affected tissues during the surgical procedure or to the surface of an implanted device or implant and/or the tissue surrounding the implant before, during, or after the surgical procedure.
- a therapeutic agent e.g., a fibrosis-inhibiting agent
- implants for use in abdominal procedures includes, without limitation, hernia meshes, restriction devices for obesity, implantable sensors, implantable pumps, peritoneal dialysis catheters, peritoneal drug-delivery catheters, GI tubes for drainage or feeding, portosystemic shunts, shunts for ascites, gastrostomy or percutaneous feeding tubes, jejunostomy endoscopic tubes, colostomy devices, drainage tubes, biliary T-tubes, hemostatic implants, enteral feeding devices, colonic and biliary stents, low profile devices, gastric banding implants, capsule endoscopes, anti-reflux devices, and esophageal stents.
- compositions alone or loaded with a therapeutic agent may be applied during open or endoscopic heart surgery to the tissue surface of the pericardium (or infiltrated into the pericardial sac), heart, great vessels, pleura, lungs, chest wall and any adjacent affected tissues during the surgical procedure or to the surface of an implanted device or implant and/or the tissue surrounding the implant before, during, or after the surgical procedure.
- a therapeutic agent e.g., a fibrosis-inhibiting agent
- implants for use in cardiac procedures includes, without limitation, heart valves (porcine, artificial), ventricular assist devices, cardiac pumps, artificial hearts, stents, bypass grafts (artificial and endogenous), patches, cardiac electrical leads, defibrillators and pacemakers.
- a therapeutic agent e.g., a fibrosis-inhibiting agent
- the compositions alone or loaded with a therapeutic agent may be applied during open or arthroscopic orthopedic surgery to the tissue surface of the bone, joint, muscle, tendon, ligament, cartilage and any adjacent affected tissues during the surgical procedure or to the surface of an implanted orthopedic device or implant and/or the tissue surrounding the implant before, during, or after the surgical procedure.
- implants for use in orthopedic procedures include plates, rods, screws, pins, wires, total and partial joint prostheses (artificial hips, knees, shoulders, phalangeal joints), reinforcement patches, tissue fillers, synthetic bone fillers, bone cement, synthetic graft material, allograft material, autograft material, artificial discs, spinal cages, and intermedulary rods.
- compositions alone or loaded with a therapeutic agent may be applied during open or endoscopic cosmetic surgery to the soft tissue implant surface before, during, or after the implantation procedure or to the surface of the tissue of the implantation pocket immediately prior to, or during implantation of the soft tissue implant.
- a therapeutic agent e.g., a fibrosis-inhibiting agent
- soft tissue implants for use in cosmetic, plastic, and reconstructive surgical procedures include face, nose, breast, chin, buttocks, chest, lip and cheek implants ) or to the surface of the soft tissue implant and/or the tissue surrounding the implant before, during, or after implantation of the soft tissue implant.
- compositions of the invention can also be formed as solid implants, a term that is used herein to refer to any solid object which is designed for insertion and use within the body, and includes bone and cartilage implants (e.g., artificial joints, retaining pins, cranial plates, and the like, of metal, plastic and/or other materials), breast implants (e.g., silicone gel envelopes, foam forms, and the like), catheters and cannulas intended for long-term use (beyond about three days) in place, artificial organs and vessels (e.g., artificial hearts, pancreases, kidneys, blood vessels, and the like), drug delivery devices (including monolithic implants, pumps and controlled release devices such as Alzet® minipumps (DURECT Corporation, Cupertino, California), steroid pellets for anabolic growth or contraception, and the like), sutures for dermal or internal use, periodontal membranes, ophthalmic shields, corneal lenticules, and the like.
- bone and cartilage implants e.g
- compositions are as a coating material for an implant (e.g., synthetic implants).
- medical implants may contain and/or are adapted to release an agent which induces or promotes adhesion between the implant and tissue or a fibrotic reaction.
- the clinical performance of numerous medical devices may be improved by anchoring the device effectively into the surrounding tissue to provide either structural support or to facilitate scarring and healing. Effective attachment of the device into the surrounding tissue, however, is not always readily achieved.
- implantable medical devices generally are composed of materials that are highly biocompatible and designed to reduce the host tissue response. These materials (e.g., stainless steel, titanium based alloys, fluoropolymers, and ceramics) typically do not provide a good substrate for host tissue attachment and ingrowth during the scarring process.
- devices can have a tendency to migrate within the vessel or tissue in which they are implanted.
- the extent to which a particular type of medical device can move or migrate after implantation depends on a variety of factors including the type and design of the device, the material(s) from which the device is formed, the mechanical attributes (e.g., flexibility and ability to conform to the surrounding geometry at the implantation site), the surface properties, and the porosity of the device or device surface.
- the tendency of a device to loosen after implantation also depends on the type of tissue and the geometry at the treatment site, where the ability of the tissue to conform around the device generally can help to secure the device in the implantation site.
- Device migration can result in device failure and, depending on the type and location of the device, can lead to leakage, vessel occlusion, and/or damage to the surrounding tissue.
- Incorporation of a fibrosis-inducing agent with the compositions of the invention can provide an effective, long-lasting and biocompatible approach for anchoring implantable medical devices into or onto biological tissue.
- the medical implant when placed in to a tissue, releases an agent that induces or promotes adhesion between the implant and the tissue or a fibrotic reaction.
- the medical implant contains or is made of a fibrosing agent, but does not release the fibrosing agent.
- the fibrosing agent contained in the medical implant induces or promotes fibrosis by direct contact of the agent to the tissue where the implant is placed.
- the tissue cavity into which the device or implant is placed can be treated with a fibrosis-inducing agent prior to, during, or after the implantation procedure. This can be accomplished, for example, by topical application of the composition comprising a fibrosing agent or by spraying the composition into the anatomical space where the device can be placed or at the interface between the implant and the tissue surface.
- Representative examples of medical implants of particular utility for use in combination with a fibrosis-inducing agent include, but are not restricted to, orthopaedic implants (artificial joints, ligaments and tendons, screws, plates, and other implantable hardware), dental implants, intravascular implants (particularly arterial and venous occlusion devices and implants; vascular destructive implants), male and female contraceptive or sterilization devices and implants, soft palate implants, embolization devices, surgical meshes (e.g., hernia repair meshes, tissue scaffolds), fistula treatments, and spinal implants (e.g., artificial intervertebral discs, stent grafts, spinal fusion devices, etc.).
- orthopaedic implants artificial joints, ligaments and tendons, screws, plates, and other implantable hardware
- dental implants include, but are not restricted to, orthopaedic implants (artificial joints, ligaments and tendons, screws, plates, and other implantable hardware), dental implants, intravascular implants (particularly arterial and venous oc
- Drug dose can be calculated as a function of dose per unit area (of the portion of the device being coated), total drug dose administered can be measured, and appropriate surface concentrations of active drug can be determined. It should be readily evident to one of skill in the art that any of the previously described fibrosis inducing agents or derivatives or analogues thereof can be utilized with the present compositions without deviating from the spirit and scope of the invention.
- the exemplary fibrosing agents used alone or in combination, should be administered under the following dosing guidelines: [0491] Utilizing talc as an exemplary fibrosis-inducing agent, the total amount of talc delivered from an implant or coated onto the surface of an implant should not exceed 100 mg (range of 1 ⁇ g to 100 mg). In one embodiment, the total amount of talc released from the implant should be in the range of 10 ⁇ g to 50 mg.
- the dose per unit area of the device i.e., the dosage of talc as a function of the surface area of the portion of the device to which drug is applied and/or incorporated
- talc should be applied to an implant surface at a dose of 0.05 ⁇ g/mm 2 -10 ⁇ g/mm 2 of surface area coated.
- the total amount of silk released from the prosthesis should be in the range of 10 ⁇ g to 50 mg.
- the dose per unit area of the device i.e., the dosage of silk as a function of the surface area of the portion of the device to which drug is applied and/or incorporated
- silk should be applied to an implant at a dose of 0.05 ⁇ g/mm 2 -10 ⁇ g/mm 2 of surface area coated.
- the total amount of chitosan delivered from an implant or coated onto the surface of an implant should not exceed 100 mg (range of 1 ⁇ g to 100 mg). In one embodiment, the total amount of chitosan released from the implant should be in the range of 10 ⁇ g to 50 mg.
- the dose per unit area of the device i.e., the dosage of chitosan as a function of the surface area of the portion of the device to which drug is applied and/or incorporated
- chitosan should be applied to an implant surface at a dose of 0.05 ⁇ g/mm 2 -10 ⁇ g/mm 2 of surface area coated.
- the total amount polylysine delivered from an implant or coated onto the surface of an implant should not exceed 100 mg (range of 1 ⁇ g to 100 mg). In one embodiment, the total amount of polylysine released from the implant should be in the range of 10 ⁇ g to 50 mg.
- the dose per unit area of the device i.e., the dosage of polylysine as a function of the surface area of the portion of the device to which drug is applied and/or incorporated
- polylysine should be applied to an implant.surface at a dose of 0.05 ⁇ g/mm 2 -10 ⁇ g/mm 2 of surface area coated.
- the total amount of fibronectin delivered from an implant or coated onto the surface of an implant should not exceed 100 mg (range of 1 ⁇ g to 100 mg). In one embodiment, the total amount of fibronectin released from the prosthesis should be in the range of 10 ⁇ g to 50 mg.
- the dose per unit area of the device i.e., the dosage of fibronectin as a function of the surface area of the portion of the device to which drug is applied and/or incorporated
- talc should be applied to an implant surface at a dose of 0.05 ⁇ g/mm 2 -10 ⁇ g/mm 2 of surface area coated.
- the total amount of bleomycin delivered from an implant, or coated onto the surface of an implant should not exceed 100 mg (range of 0.01 ⁇ g to 100 mg). In one embodiment, the total amount of bleomycin released from the implant should be in the range of 0.10 ⁇ g to 50 mg.
- the dose per unit area of the device i.e., the dosage of bleomycin as a function of the surface area of the portion of the device to which drug is applied and/or incorporated
- bleomycin should be applied to an implant surface at a dose of 0.005 ⁇ g/mm 2 -10 ⁇ g/mm 2 of surface area coated. In one embodiment, bleomycin is released from the surface of an implant such that fibrosis in the tissue is promoted for a period ranging from several hours to several months.
- the total amount of CTGF delivered from an implant or coated onto the surface of an implant should not exceed 100 mg (range of 0.01 ⁇ g to 100 mg). In one embodiment, the total amount of CTGF released from the implant should be in the range of 0.10 ⁇ g to 50 mg.
- the dose per unit area of the device i.e., the dosage of CTGF as a function of the surface area of the portion of the device to which drug is applied and/or incorporated
- CTGF should be applied to an implant surface at a dose of 0.005 ⁇ g/mm 2 -10 ⁇ g/mm 2 of surface area coated.
- the fibrosing agent e.g., talc, silk, chitosan, polylysine, fibronectin, bleomycin, CTGF
- the fibrosing agent may be released from the surface of the implant such that fibrosis in the tissue is promoted for a period ranging from several hours to several months.
- the fibrosing agent may be released in effective concentrations for a period ranging from 1 hour- 30 days.
- analogues and derivatives of the fibrosing agent e.g., analogues and derivatives of talc, silk, chitosan, polylysine, fibronectin, bleomycin, CTGF, as previously described
- the above dosing parameters are then adjusted according to the relative potency of the analogue or derivative as compared to the parent compound (e.g., a compound twice as potent as the agent is administered at half the above parameters, a compound half as potent as the agent is administered at twice the above parameters, etc.).
- the device may additionally comprise an inflammatory cytokine (e.g., TGF ⁇ , PDGF, VEGF, bFGF, TNF ⁇ , NGF, GM-CSF, IGF-a, IL-I, IL-l- ⁇ , IL-8, IL-6, and growth hormone) and/or a bone morphogenic protein (BMP) (e.g., BMP-2, BMP-3, BMP-4, BMP-5, BMP-6, or BMP-7 or an analogue or derivative thereof).
- an inflammatory cytokine e.g., TGF ⁇ , PDGF, VEGF, bFGF, TNF ⁇ , NGF, GM-CSF, IGF-a, IL-I, IL-l- ⁇ , IL-8, IL-6, and growth hormone
- BMP bone morphogenic protein
- Bone morphogenic protein(s) are to be used in formulations at concentrations that range from 0.001 ⁇ g/ml to approximately 20 mg/ml depending on the specific clinical application, formulation type (e.g., gel, liquid, solid, semi-solid), formulation chemistry, duration of required application, type of medical device interface and formulation volume and or surface area coverage required.
- formulation type e.g., gel, liquid, solid, semi-solid
- formulation chemistry e.g., duration of required application, type of medical device interface and formulation volume and or surface area coverage required.
- the bone morphogenic protein is released in effective concentrations for a period ranging from 1 - 180 days.
- the total dose for a single application is typically not to exceed 500 mg (range of 0.001 ⁇ g to 500 mg); preferred 1 ⁇ g to 250 mg.
- the dose is per unit area of 0.001 ⁇ g - 1000 ⁇ g per mm 2 ; with a preferred dose of 0.01 ⁇ g/mm 2 - 200 ⁇ g/mm 2 .
- Minimum concentration of 10 "9 - 10 "4 M of bone morphogenic protein is to be maintained on the device surface.
- Inflammatory cytokines are to be used in formulations at concentrations that range from 0.0001 ⁇ g/ml to approximately 20 mg/ml depending on the specific clinical application, formulation type (e.g., gel, liquid, solid, semi-solid), formulation chemistry, duration of required application, type of medical device interface and formulation volume and or surface area coverage required.
- the inflammatory cytokine is released in effective concentrations for a period ranging from 1 - 180 days.
- the total dose for a single application is typically not to exceed 500 mg (range of 0.0001 ⁇ g to 100 mg); preferred 0.001 ⁇ g to 50 mg.
- the dose is per unit area of 0.0001 ⁇ g - 500 ⁇ g per mm 2 ; with a preferred dose of 0.001 ⁇ g/mm 2 - 200 ⁇ g/mm 2 .
- Minimum concentration of 10 "10 - 10 "4 g/ml of inflammatory cytokine is to be maintained on the device surface.
- the device may alone or additionally comprise an agent that stimulates cellular proliferation.
- agents include: dexamethasone, isotretinoin (13-cis retinoic acid), 17- ⁇ - estradiol, estradiol, l- ⁇ -25 dihydroxyvitamin D 3, diethylstibesterol, cyclosporine A, L-NAME, all- trans retinoic acid (ATRA), and analogues and derivatives thereof. Doses used are those concentrations which are demonstrated to stimulate cell proliferation.
- the proliferative agents are to be used in formulations at concentrations that range from 0.1 ng/ml to 25 mg/ml depending on the specific clinical application, formulation type, formulation chemistry, duration of required application, type of medical device interface and formulation volume and or surface area coverage required.
- the proliferative agent is released in effective concentrations for a period ranging from 1 - 180 days.
- the total dose for a single application is typically not to exceed 500 mg (range of 0.0001 ⁇ g to 200 mg); preferred 0.001 ⁇ g to 100 mg.
- the dose is per unit area of 0.00001 ⁇ g - 500 ⁇ g per mm 2 ; with a preferred dose of 0.0001 ⁇ g/mm 2 - 200 ⁇ g/mm 2 .
- Minimum concentration of 10 11 - 10 '6 M of proliferative agent is to be maintained on the device surface.
- medical implants may be coated with, or otherwise adapted to release or incorporate an agent which inhibits the formation of reactive scar tissue on, or around, the surface of the device or implant.
- Compositions that include a fibrosis-inhibiting agent may be used in combination with a variety of medical implants to make them resistant to overgrowth by inflammatory and fibrous scar tissue upon implantation.
- Compositions and methods are described for coating medical devices and implants with drug-delivery compositions such that the pharmaceutical agent is delivered in therapeutic levels over a period sufficient to allow normal healing to occur.
- an implanted device may be combined with a therapeutic agent (e.g., an anti-fibrotic agent) to minimize the formation of post-operative surgical adhesions, unwanted scarring in the vicinity of the implant, and encapsulation of the implant by a fibrous connective tissue capsule.
- a therapeutic agent e.g., an anti-fibrotic agent
- Examples of medical devices of particular utility for use in combination with a fibrosis- inhibiting agent include, but are not restricted to, vascular stents, gastrointestinal stents, tracheal/bronchial stents, genital-urinary stents, ENT stents, intraocular lenses, implants for hypertrophic scars and keloids, vascular grafts, anastomotic connector devices, surgical adhesion barriers, glaucoma drainage devices, film or mesh, prosthetic heart valves, tympanostomy tubes, penile implants, endotracheal and tracheostomy tubes, peritoneal dialysis catheters, intracranial pressure monitors, vena cava filters, central venous catheters, ventricular assist devices (e.g., LVAD' s), spinal prostheses, and gastrointestinal drainage tubes.
- vascular stents vascular stents
- gastrointestinal stents e.g., tracheal/bron
- the medical device may be an electrical device (e.g., a device having electrical components that can be placed in contact with tissue in an animal host and can provide electrical excitation to nervous or muscular tissue). Electrical devices can generate electrical impulses and may be used to treat many bodily dysfunctions and disorders by blocking, masking, or stimulating electrical signals within the body. Electrical medical devices of particular utility in the present invention include, but are not restricted to, devices used in the treatment of cardiac rhythm abnormalities, pain relief, epilepsy, Parkinson's Disease, movement disorders, obesity, depression, anxiety and hearing loss.
- electrical devices include neurostimulator and neurostimulation devices (e.g., electrical devices for electrical excitation of the central, autonomic, or peripheral nervous system), cardiac stimulation device such as cardiac rhythm management devices, cardiac pacemakers, implantable cardiac defibrillators (ICD) and other electrical devices for electrical excitation of cardiac muscle tissue (including the specialized cardiac muscle cells that make up the conductive pathways of the heart).
- Electrical devices also include electrical leads which are used as a conductor to carry electrical signals from the generator to the tissues.
- the electrical lead may be a wire or other material that transmits electrical impulses from a generator (e.g., pacemaker, defibrillator, or other neurostimulator).
- Electrical leads may be unipolar, in which they are adapted to provide effective therapy with only one electrode. Multi-polar leads are also available, including bipolar, tripolar and quadripolar leads.
- the medical device may be an implantable sensor (i.e., a medical device that is implanted in the body to detect blood or tissue levels of a particular chemical (e.g., glucose, electrolytes, drugs, hormones) and/or changes in body chemistry, metabolites, function, pressure, flow, physical structure, electrical activity or other variable parameter).
- implantable sensors include, blood/tissue glucose monitors, electrolyte sensors, blood constituent sensors, temperature sensors, pH sensors, optical sensors, amperometric sensors, pressure sensors, biosensors, sensing transponders, strain sensors, activity sensors and magnetoresistive sensors.
- the medical device may be a drug-delivery pump (i.e., a medical device that includes a pump which is configured to deliver a biologically active agent (e.g., a drug) at a regulated dose).
- a drug-delivery pump i.e., a medical device that includes a pump which is configured to deliver a biologically active agent (e.g., a drug) at a regulated dose.
- These devices are implanted within the body and may include an external transmitter for programming the controlled release of drug, or alternatively, may include an implantable sensor that provides the trigger for the drug delivery pump to release drug as physiologically required.
- Drug- delivery pumps may be used to deliver virtually any agent, but specific examples include insulin for the treatment of diabetes, medication for the relief of pain, chemotherapy for the treatment of cancer, anti-spastic agents for the treatment of movement and muscular disorders, or antibiotics for the treatment of infections.
- constant flow drug delivery pumps e.g., programmable drug delivery pumps, intrathecal pumps, implantable insulin delivery pumps, implantable osmotic pumps, ocular drug delivery pumps and implants
- metering systems e.g., peristaltic (roller) pumps
- electronically driven pumps elastomeric pumps
- spring-contraction pumps e.g., gas-driven
- the medical device may be a soft tissue implant.
- Soft tissue implants are medical devices that may includes a volume replacement material for augmentation or reconstruction to replace a whole or part of a living structure. Soft tissue implants are used for the reconstruction of surgically or traumatically created tissue voids, augmentation of tissues or organs, contouring of tissues, the restoration of bulk to aging tissues, and to correct soft tissue folds or wrinkles (rhytides). Soft tissue implants may be used for the augmentation of tissue for cosmetic (aesthetic) enhancement or in association with reconstructive surgery following disease or surgical resection. Representative examples of soft tissue implants include breast implants, chin implants, calf implants, cheek implants and other facial implants, buttocks implants, and nasal implants.
- Soft tissue implants that release a therapeutic agent for reducing scarring at the implant- tissue interface can be used to enhance the appearance, increase the longevity, reduce the need for corrective surgery or repeat procedures, decrease the incidence of pain and other symptoms, and improve the clinical function of implant. Accordingly, the present invention provides soft tissue implants that are coated or otherwise incorporate an anti-scarring agent or a composition that includes an anti-scarring agent.
- any fibrosis-inhibiting agent described above can be utilized in the practice of this embodiment.
- medical implants may be adapted to release an agent that inhibits one or more of the four general components of the process of fibrosis (or scarring), including: formation of new blood vessels (angiogenesis), migration and proliferation of connective tissue cells (such as fibroblasts or smooth muscle cells), deposition of extracellular matrix (ECM), and remodeling (maturation and organization of the fibrous tissue).
- angiogenesis new blood vessels
- connective tissue cells such as fibroblasts or smooth muscle cells
- ECM extracellular matrix
- remodeling maturation and organization of the fibrous tissue
- agents for use with medical implants include the following: cell cycle inhibitors including (A) anthracyclines (e.g., doxorubicin and mitoxantrone), (B) taxanes (e.g., paclitaxel, TAXOTERE and docetaxel), and (C) podophyllotoxins (e.g., etoposide); (D) immunomodulators (e.g., sirolimus, everolimus, tacrolimus); (E) heat shock protein 90 antagonists (e.g., geldanamycin); (F) HMGCoA reductase inhibitors (e.g., simvastatin); (G) inosine monophosphate dehydrogenase inhibitors (e.g., mycophenolic acid, l-alpha-25 dihydroxy vitamin D 3 ); (H) NF kappa B inhibitors (e.g., Bay 11-7082); (I) antimycotic agents (e.
- A anthra
- the exemplary anti- fibrosing agents used alone or in combination, should be administered under the following dosing guidelines.
- the total amount (dose) of anti-scarring agent in or on the device may be in the range of about 0.01 ⁇ g-10 ⁇ g, or 10 ⁇ g- 10 mg, or 10 mg-250 mg, or 250 mg-1000 mg, or 1000 mg-2500 mg.
- the dose (amount) of anti-scarring agent per unit area of device surface to which the agent is applied may be in the range of about 0.01 ⁇ g/mm 2 - 1 ⁇ g/mm 2 , or 1 ⁇ g/mm 2 - 10 ⁇ g/mm 2 , or 10 ⁇ g/mm 2 - 250 ⁇ g/mm 2 , 250 ⁇ g/mm 2 - 1000 ⁇ g/mm 2 , or 1000 ⁇ g/mm 2 - 2500 ⁇ g/mm 2 .
- the exact dose administered will vary with device size, surface area and design; however, certain principles can be applied in the application of this art.
- Drug dose can be calculated as a function of dose per unit area (of the portion of the device being coated), total drug dose administered, and appropriate surface concentrations of active drug can be determined. Drugs are to be used at concentrations that range from several times more than to 10%, 5%, or even less than 1% of the concentration typically used in a single chemotherapeutic systemic dose application. Preferably, the drug is released in effective concentrations for a period ranging from 1 — 90 days.
- A) Cell cycle inhibitors including doxorubicin and mitoxantrone including doxorubicin and mitoxantrone.
- Doxorubicin analogues and derivatives thereof total dose not to exceed 25 mg (range of 0.1 ⁇ g to 25 mg); preferred 1 ⁇ g to 5 mg.
- Mitoxantrone and analogues and derivatives thereof total dose not to exceed 5 mg (range of 0.01 ⁇ g to 5 mg); preferred 0.1 ⁇ g to 1 mg.
- the dose per unit area of the device of 0.01 ⁇ g - 20 ⁇ g per mm 2 ; preferred dose of 0.05 ⁇ g/mm 2 - 3 ⁇ g/mm 2 .
- C Cell cycle inhibitors such as podophyllotoxins (e.g., etoposide): total dose not to exceed 10 mg (range of 0.1 ⁇ g to 10 mg); preferred 1 ⁇ g to 3 mg. The dose per unit area of the device of 0.1 ⁇ g - 10 ⁇ g per mm 2 ; preferred dose of 0.25 ⁇ g/mm 2 - 5 ⁇ g/mm 2 .
- D Immunomodulators including sirolimus and everolimus.
- Sirolimus i.e., rapamycin, RAPAMUNE
- Total dose not to exceed 10 mg range of 0.1 ⁇ g to 10 mg
- preferred 10 ⁇ g to 1 mg preferred 10 ⁇ g to 1 mg.
- Heat shock protein 90 antagonists e.g., geldanamycin
- analogues and derivatives thereof total dose not to exceed 20 mg (range of 0.1 ⁇ g to 20 mg); preferred 1 ⁇ g to 5 mg.
- the dose per unit area of the device of 0.1 ⁇ g - 10 ⁇ g per mm 2 ; preferred dose of 0.25 ⁇ g/mm 2 - 5 ⁇ g/mm 2 .
- HMGCoA reductase inhibitors e.g., simvastatin
- analogues and derivatives thereof total dose not to exceed 2000 mg (range of 10.0 ⁇ g to 2000 mg); preferred 10 ⁇ g to 300 mg.
- the dose per unit area of the device of 1.0 ⁇ g - 1000 ⁇ g per mm 2 ; preferred dose of 2.5 ⁇ g/mm 2 - 500 ⁇ g/mm 2 .
- Inosine monophosphate dehydrogenase inhibitors e.g., mycophenolic acid, l-alpha-25 dihydroxy vitamin D 3
- analogues and derivatives thereof total dose not to exceed 2000 mg (range of 10.0 ⁇ g to 2000 mg); preferred 10 ⁇ g to 300 mg.
- the dose per unit area of the device of 1.0 ⁇ g - 1000 ⁇ g per mm 2 ; preferred dose of 2.5 ⁇ g/mm 2 - 500 ⁇ g/mm 2 .
- NF kappa B inhibitors e.g., Bay 1 1- 7082
- analogues and derivatives thereof total dose not to exceed 200 mg (range of 1.0 ⁇ g to 200 mg); preferred 1 ⁇ g to 50 mg.
- Antimycotic agents e.g., sulconizole
- analogues and derivatives thereof total dose not to exceed 2000 mg (range of 10.0 ⁇ g to 2000 mg); preferred 10 ⁇ g to 300 mg.
- p38 MAP Kinase Inhibitors e.g., SB202190
- analogues and derivatives thereof total dose not to exceed 2000 mg (range of 10.0 ⁇ g to 2000 mg); preferred 10 ⁇ g to 300 mg.
- the dose per unit area of the device of 1.0 ⁇ g - 1000 ⁇ g per mm 2 ; preferred dose of 2.5 ⁇ g/mm 2 - 500 ⁇ g/mm 2 .
- anti-angiogenic agents e.g., halofuginone bromide
- analogues and derivatives thereof total dose not to exceed 10 mg (range of 0.1 ⁇ g to 10 mg); preferred 1 ⁇ g to 3 mg.
- the dose per unit area of the device of 0.1 ⁇ g - 10 ⁇ g per mm 2 ; preferred dose of 0.25 ⁇ g/mm 2 - 5 ⁇ g/mm 2 .
- immunomodulators and appropriate dosages ranges for use with medical implants include the following: (A) Biolimus and derivatives and analogues thereof: Total dose should not exceed 10 mg (range of 0.1 ⁇ g to 10 mg); preferred 10 ⁇ g to 1 mg. The dose per unit area of 0.1 ⁇ g - 100 ⁇ g per mm 2 of surface area; preferred dose of 0.3 ⁇ g/mm 2 - 10 ⁇ g/mm 2 . (B) Tresperimus and derivatives and analogues thereof: Total dose should not exceed 10 mg (range of 0.1 ⁇ g to 10 mg); preferred 10 ⁇ g to 1 mg.
- E Gusperimus and derivatives and analogues thereof: Total dose should not exceed 10 mg (range of 0.1 ⁇ g to 10 mg); preferred 10 ⁇ g to 1 mg.
- Pimecrolimus and derivatives and analogues thereof Total dose should not exceed 10 mg (range of 0.1 ⁇ g to 10 mg); preferred 10 ⁇ g to 1 mg.
- the composition is exposed to the aqueous environment, and a thin layer of the composition is then applied to a surface of the implant before substantial inter-reaction has occurred.
- the components are selected so as to result in a matrix that has a net neutral charge.
- Application of the composition to the implant surface may be by extrusion, brushing, spraying (as described above), or by any other convenient means. Following application of the composition to the implant surface, inter-reaction is allowed to continue until complete and the three-dimensional matrix is formed.
- this method can be used to coat the surface of any type of synthetic implant, it is particularly useful for implants where reduced thrombogenicity is an important consideration, such as artificial blood vessels and heart valves, vascular grafts, vascular stents, and stent/graft combinations.
- the method may also be used to coat implantable surgical membranes (e.g., monofilament polypropylene) or meshes (e.g., for use in hernia repair).
- Implantable surgical membranes e.g., monofilament polypropylene
- meshes e.g., for use in hernia repair.
- compositions of the invention can also be coated on a suitable fibrous material, which can then be wrapped around a bone to provide structural integrity to the bone.
- suitable fibrous material refers to a fibrous material which is substantially insoluble in water, non-immunogenic, biocompatible, and immiscible with the crosslinkable compositions of the invention.
- the fibrous material may comprise any of a variety of materials having these characteristics and may be combined with crosslinkable compositions herein in order to form and/or provide structural integrity to various implants or devices used in connection with medical and pharmaceutical uses.
Abstract
Description
Claims
Priority Applications (4)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
KR1020107011113A KR101148445B1 (en) | 2004-04-28 | 2005-04-28 | Compositions and systems for forming crosslinked biomaterials and associated methods of preparation and use |
BRPI0510477-7A BRPI0510477B1 (en) | 2004-04-28 | 2005-04-28 | METHOD FOR FORMING A GEL AND DEVICE FOR USE IN MEDICAL APPLICATIONS |
NZ550964A NZ550964A (en) | 2004-04-28 | 2005-04-28 | Compositions and systems for forming crosslinked biomaterials and associated methods of preparation and use |
KR1020067025027A KR100974733B1 (en) | 2004-04-28 | 2005-04-28 | Compositions and systems for forming crosslinked biomaterials and associated methods of preparation and use |
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US56656904P | 2004-04-28 | 2004-04-28 | |
US60/566,569 | 2004-04-28 |
Publications (2)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2006083260A2 true WO2006083260A2 (en) | 2006-08-10 |
WO2006083260A3 WO2006083260A3 (en) | 2009-02-26 |
Family
ID=36692662
Family Applications (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/US2005/015036 WO2006078282A2 (en) | 2004-04-28 | 2005-04-28 | Compositions and systems for forming crosslinked biomaterials and associated methods of preparation and use |
PCT/US2005/014906 WO2006083260A2 (en) | 2004-04-28 | 2005-04-28 | Compositions and systems for forming crosslinked biomaterials and associated methods of preparation and use |
Family Applications Before (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/US2005/015036 WO2006078282A2 (en) | 2004-04-28 | 2005-04-28 | Compositions and systems for forming crosslinked biomaterials and associated methods of preparation and use |
Country Status (7)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (3) | US8067031B2 (en) |
KR (2) | KR101148445B1 (en) |
CN (2) | CN101080246A (en) |
BR (1) | BRPI0510477B1 (en) |
HK (1) | HK1204584A1 (en) |
NZ (1) | NZ550964A (en) |
WO (2) | WO2006078282A2 (en) |
Cited By (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US8101371B2 (en) | 2007-10-18 | 2012-01-24 | Musc Foundation For Research Development | Methods for the diagnosis of genitourinary cancer |
CN110540404A (en) * | 2019-10-17 | 2019-12-06 | 广州润虹医药科技股份有限公司 | calcium phosphate bone cement with hollow through structure, preparation method and application thereof |
Families Citing this family (180)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20060177416A1 (en) | 2003-10-14 | 2006-08-10 | Medivas, Llc | Polymer particle delivery compositions and methods of use |
US6702744B2 (en) | 2001-06-20 | 2004-03-09 | Advanced Cardiovascular Systems, Inc. | Agents that stimulate therapeutic angiogenesis and techniques and devices that enable their delivery |
US8608661B1 (en) | 2001-11-30 | 2013-12-17 | Advanced Cardiovascular Systems, Inc. | Method for intravascular delivery of a treatment agent beyond a blood vessel wall |
US7361368B2 (en) | 2002-06-28 | 2008-04-22 | Advanced Cardiovascular Systems, Inc. | Device and method for combining a treatment agent and a gel |
US20090165784A1 (en) * | 2007-12-28 | 2009-07-02 | Tyco Healthcare Group Lp | Lubricious intubation device |
US8383158B2 (en) | 2003-04-15 | 2013-02-26 | Abbott Cardiovascular Systems Inc. | Methods and compositions to treat myocardial conditions |
US8038991B1 (en) | 2003-04-15 | 2011-10-18 | Abbott Cardiovascular Systems Inc. | High-viscosity hyaluronic acid compositions to treat myocardial conditions |
US8821473B2 (en) | 2003-04-15 | 2014-09-02 | Abbott Cardiovascular Systems Inc. | Methods and compositions to treat myocardial conditions |
US20050208095A1 (en) * | 2003-11-20 | 2005-09-22 | Angiotech International Ag | Polymer compositions and methods for their use |
AU2004322006B2 (en) * | 2004-07-31 | 2012-05-24 | Brainguard Co., Ltd. | Silk peptide improving neuroprotective and neurofunctional effects and a method of its preparation |
WO2006015490A1 (en) * | 2004-08-13 | 2006-02-16 | Ottawa Health Research Institute | Ophthalmic devices and related methods and compositions |
US7854944B2 (en) | 2004-12-17 | 2010-12-21 | Advanced Cardiovascular Systems, Inc. | Tissue regeneration |
US20080125745A1 (en) | 2005-04-19 | 2008-05-29 | Shubhayu Basu | Methods and compositions for treating post-cardial infarction damage |
US8303972B2 (en) | 2005-04-19 | 2012-11-06 | Advanced Cardiovascular Systems, Inc. | Hydrogel bioscaffoldings and biomedical device coatings |
US8187621B2 (en) | 2005-04-19 | 2012-05-29 | Advanced Cardiovascular Systems, Inc. | Methods and compositions for treating post-myocardial infarction damage |
US9539410B2 (en) | 2005-04-19 | 2017-01-10 | Abbott Cardiovascular Systems Inc. | Methods and compositions for treating post-cardial infarction damage |
US8828433B2 (en) | 2005-04-19 | 2014-09-09 | Advanced Cardiovascular Systems, Inc. | Hydrogel bioscaffoldings and biomedical device coatings |
AU2006244393B2 (en) * | 2005-05-05 | 2012-06-21 | Cook Biotech Incorporated | Implantable materials and methods for inhibiting tissue adhesion formation |
US20060287257A1 (en) * | 2005-06-20 | 2006-12-21 | Stockel Richard F | Pharmaceutical compositions to treat diseases caused by mycobacterium |
WO2007033082A2 (en) | 2005-09-12 | 2007-03-22 | Abela Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Compositions comprising dimethyl sulfoxide (dmso) |
WO2007033180A1 (en) | 2005-09-12 | 2007-03-22 | Abela Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Materials for facilitating administration of dimethyl sulfoxide (dmso) and related compounds |
US8480797B2 (en) | 2005-09-12 | 2013-07-09 | Abela Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Activated carbon systems for facilitating use of dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO) by removal of same, related compounds, or associated odors |
JP5399072B2 (en) | 2005-09-12 | 2014-01-29 | アベラ ファーマスーティカルズ インコーポレイテッド | System for removing dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO) or related compounds or odors associated therewith |
WO2007035938A2 (en) | 2005-09-22 | 2007-03-29 | Medivas, Llc | BIS-(α-AMINO)-DIOL-DIESTER-CONTAINING POLY(ESTER AMIDE) AND POLY(ESTER URETHANE) COMPOSITIONS AND METHODS OF USE |
WO2007038246A2 (en) | 2005-09-22 | 2007-04-05 | Medivas, Llc | Solid polymer delivery compositions and methods for use thereof |
CN100387711C (en) * | 2006-01-06 | 2008-05-14 | 青岛科技大学 | Silica-gel-carrier surface macroporous chitin substrate for lysozyme affinity chromatography |
US20090038701A1 (en) | 2006-01-17 | 2009-02-12 | Baxter International Inc. | Device, system and method for mixing |
US20090319044A1 (en) * | 2006-01-31 | 2009-12-24 | Francis Young-In Lee | Methods and Compositions for Improving the Incorporation of Orthopaedic and Orthodontic Implants |
US20070270970A1 (en) * | 2006-03-14 | 2007-11-22 | Sdgi Holdings, Inc. | Spinal implants with improved wear resistance |
US20070233246A1 (en) * | 2006-03-31 | 2007-10-04 | Sdgi Holdings, Inc. | Spinal implants with improved mechanical response |
WO2007139808A2 (en) * | 2006-05-25 | 2007-12-06 | Ayyala Ramesh S | Device for delivery of antifibrotic agents & method |
KR101443926B1 (en) | 2006-06-15 | 2014-10-02 | 마이크로벤션, 인코포레이티드 | Embolization device constructed from expansible polymer |
US7732190B2 (en) | 2006-07-31 | 2010-06-08 | Advanced Cardiovascular Systems, Inc. | Modified two-component gelation systems, methods of use and methods of manufacture |
DE102006037158A1 (en) * | 2006-08-02 | 2008-02-14 | Bioxsys Gmbh | Method for determining the sensitivity of tumors to capecitabine and test kit |
TWI436793B (en) | 2006-08-02 | 2014-05-11 | Baxter Int | Rapidly acting dry sealant and methods for use and manufacture |
US20080039362A1 (en) * | 2006-08-09 | 2008-02-14 | Afmedica, Inc. | Combination drug therapy for reducing scar tissue formation |
US9242005B1 (en) | 2006-08-21 | 2016-01-26 | Abbott Cardiovascular Systems Inc. | Pro-healing agent formulation compositions, methods and treatments |
EP2063899A2 (en) * | 2006-09-22 | 2009-06-03 | Bioxell S.p.a. | Use of vitamin d compounds for the prevention of adhesions |
US20080078411A1 (en) * | 2006-10-03 | 2008-04-03 | Restore Medical, Inc. | Tongue implant for sleep apnea |
US20080078412A1 (en) * | 2006-10-03 | 2008-04-03 | Restore Medical, Inc. | Tongue implant |
US9005672B2 (en) | 2006-11-17 | 2015-04-14 | Abbott Cardiovascular Systems Inc. | Methods of modifying myocardial infarction expansion |
US8741326B2 (en) | 2006-11-17 | 2014-06-03 | Abbott Cardiovascular Systems Inc. | Modified two-component gelation systems, methods of use and methods of manufacture |
US8192760B2 (en) | 2006-12-04 | 2012-06-05 | Abbott Cardiovascular Systems Inc. | Methods and compositions for treating tissue using silk proteins |
US9474833B2 (en) | 2006-12-18 | 2016-10-25 | Cook Medical Technologies Llc | Stent graft with releasable therapeutic agent and soluble coating |
US20080226724A1 (en) * | 2007-01-19 | 2008-09-18 | Genentech, Inc. | Prevention of hydrogel viscosity loss |
EP2114346B1 (en) * | 2007-01-25 | 2018-08-22 | Hyperbranch Medical Technology, Inc. | Applicators for multiple component formulations and the like |
US20080188932A1 (en) * | 2007-02-07 | 2008-08-07 | Harrup Mason K | Coated medical implants, methods of coating medical implants, and methods of coating materials |
WO2008098418A1 (en) * | 2007-02-14 | 2008-08-21 | Shandong Intech Medical Technology Co., Ltd. | Intracoronary stent with asymmetric drug releasing controlled coating |
US8642067B2 (en) | 2007-04-02 | 2014-02-04 | Allergen, Inc. | Methods and compositions for intraocular administration to treat ocular conditions |
US20080255041A1 (en) * | 2007-04-11 | 2008-10-16 | Ebi, L.P. | Treatment of annulus fibrosis defects |
US20080287633A1 (en) * | 2007-05-18 | 2008-11-20 | Drumheller Paul D | Hydrogel Materials |
EP2178541A4 (en) * | 2007-07-17 | 2012-11-14 | Medivas Llc | Bioabsorbable elastomeric arterial support device and methods of use |
CN102112139A (en) * | 2007-10-30 | 2011-06-29 | 乌第有限合伙公司 | Method and system for sustained-release of sclerosing agent |
US20090117039A1 (en) * | 2007-11-02 | 2009-05-07 | Boston Scientific Scimed, Inc. | Charged biodegradable polymers for medical applications |
US20130142733A1 (en) * | 2007-11-05 | 2013-06-06 | Vanderbilt University | Multifunctional degradable nanoparticles with control over size and functionalities |
US11254786B2 (en) | 2007-11-05 | 2022-02-22 | Vanderbilt University | Multifunctional degradable nanoparticles with control over size and functionalities |
WO2009070698A1 (en) * | 2007-11-29 | 2009-06-04 | The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Of New York | Microsphere skin treatment |
US20110027379A1 (en) * | 2007-12-06 | 2011-02-03 | Cornell University | Oligo-Ethylene Glycol-Based Polymer Compositions and Methods of Use |
EP2222349B1 (en) * | 2007-12-17 | 2014-03-12 | Anna Love | Soft tissue filler |
US8299316B2 (en) * | 2007-12-18 | 2012-10-30 | Ethicon, Inc. | Hemostatic device |
EP2231215B1 (en) | 2007-12-21 | 2019-01-30 | MicroVention, Inc. | Hydrogel filaments for biomedical uses |
EP2599508B1 (en) | 2008-01-24 | 2016-05-25 | University of Utah Research Foundation | Adhesive complex coacervates and methods of making and using thereof |
US8283384B2 (en) | 2008-01-24 | 2012-10-09 | University Of Utah Research Foundation | Adhesive complex coacervates and methods of making and using thereof |
CA2729646C (en) * | 2008-07-03 | 2016-10-18 | Vesseltek Biomedical, Llc | Controlled and localized release of retinoids to improve neointimal hyperplasia |
US8207264B2 (en) * | 2008-07-11 | 2012-06-26 | Tyco Healthcare Group Lp | Functionalized inclusion complexes as crosslinkers |
US8603532B2 (en) | 2008-10-20 | 2013-12-10 | Massachusetts Institute Of Technology | Nanostructures for drug delivery |
BRPI0921494A2 (en) | 2008-11-03 | 2018-10-30 | Prad Reasearch And Development Ltd | method of planning a underground forming sampling operation, method of controlling a underground forming sampling operation, method of controlling a drilling operation for an underground formation, and method of sampling during the drilling operation. |
US9234100B2 (en) * | 2009-02-20 | 2016-01-12 | Uniboard Canada Inc. | Chitosan-based adhesives and uses thereof |
US8573027B2 (en) | 2009-02-27 | 2013-11-05 | Tandem Diabetes Care, Inc. | Methods and devices for determination of flow reservoir volume |
US9250106B2 (en) | 2009-02-27 | 2016-02-02 | Tandem Diabetes Care, Inc. | Methods and devices for determination of flow reservoir volume |
GB0912855D0 (en) * | 2009-07-23 | 2009-08-26 | Orthogem Ltd | Composite delivery device |
CA2921304C (en) | 2009-07-30 | 2018-06-05 | Tandem Diabetes Care, Inc. | Infusion pump system with disposable cartridge having pressure venting and pressure feedback |
US9993252B2 (en) | 2009-10-26 | 2018-06-12 | Microvention, Inc. | Embolization device constructed from expansile polymer |
WO2011053874A1 (en) | 2009-10-30 | 2011-05-05 | Tandem Abela Development Group Llc | Dimethyl sulfoxide (dmso) and methylsulfonylmethane (msm) formulations to treat osteoarthritis |
US8623274B2 (en) | 2009-11-25 | 2014-01-07 | Loma Linda University Medical Center | Chitosan-based hemostatic textile |
US20130017265A1 (en) * | 2009-12-16 | 2013-01-17 | Massachusetts Institute Of Technology | Particles for multiple agent delivery |
US8889193B2 (en) | 2010-02-25 | 2014-11-18 | The Johns Hopkins University | Sustained delivery of therapeutic agents to an eye compartment |
US20130123839A1 (en) * | 2010-03-25 | 2013-05-16 | Tyco Healthcare Group Lp | Chemical knots for sutures |
WO2011119878A1 (en) * | 2010-03-25 | 2011-09-29 | Tyco Healthcare Group Lp | Functionalized adhesive for medical devices |
EP2555813B1 (en) * | 2010-04-05 | 2019-08-07 | Neomend, Inc. | Apparatus for wound sealant application |
SA111320355B1 (en) | 2010-04-07 | 2015-01-08 | Baxter Heathcare S A | Hemostatic sponge |
WO2011130539A2 (en) * | 2010-04-14 | 2011-10-20 | Northwestern University | Liquid cast biodegradable arterial stent |
WO2011140517A2 (en) | 2010-05-07 | 2011-11-10 | Medicus Biosciences, Llc | Methods for treating diseases of the lung |
US8697111B2 (en) | 2010-05-12 | 2014-04-15 | Covidien Lp | Osteochondral implant comprising osseous phase and chondral phase |
US20110287067A1 (en) | 2010-05-24 | 2011-11-24 | University Of Utah Research Foundation | Reinforced adhesive complex coacervates and methods of making and using thereof |
WO2012065148A2 (en) | 2010-11-12 | 2012-05-18 | University Of Utah Research Foundation | Simple adhesive coacervates and methods of making and using thereof |
US8551525B2 (en) | 2010-12-23 | 2013-10-08 | Biostructures, Llc | Bone graft materials and methods |
CA2824471C (en) | 2011-01-04 | 2020-07-21 | Bender Analytical Holding B.V. | Cross-linked polymers and implants derived from electrophilically activated polyoxazoline |
CA2857944C (en) * | 2011-01-31 | 2016-11-29 | Northwestern University | Injectable thermoresponsive polyelectrolytes |
WO2012109363A2 (en) | 2011-02-08 | 2012-08-16 | The Johns Hopkins University | Mucus penetrating gene carriers |
WO2012145431A2 (en) | 2011-04-18 | 2012-10-26 | Microvention, Inc. | Embolic devices |
CN103748139B (en) | 2011-06-23 | 2016-08-17 | 帝斯曼知识产权资产管理有限公司 | For delivering the micron particle comprising biodegradable polyester-amide copolymer or the nano-particle of bioactivator |
US9873765B2 (en) | 2011-06-23 | 2018-01-23 | Dsm Ip Assets, B.V. | Biodegradable polyesteramide copolymers for drug delivery |
EP2726218A4 (en) * | 2011-06-28 | 2015-03-25 | Univ Utah Res Found | Adhesive complex coacervates and methods of making and using thereof |
US10111985B2 (en) | 2011-08-10 | 2018-10-30 | Medicus Biosciences, Llc | Biocompatible hydrogel polymer formulations for the controlled delivery of biomolecules |
US11083821B2 (en) | 2011-08-10 | 2021-08-10 | C.P. Medical Corporation | Biocompatible hydrogel polymer formulations for the controlled delivery of biomolecules |
ES2661461T3 (en) | 2012-01-02 | 2018-04-02 | Universiteit Gent | Polyoxazoline polymers and methods for their preparation, conjugates of these polymers, and their medical uses |
KR101401632B1 (en) | 2012-02-20 | 2014-06-03 | 주식회사 제노스 | Baloon carteter and method for producing the same |
EP2817031A4 (en) * | 2012-02-22 | 2015-08-05 | Tufts College | Compositions and methods for ocular delivery of a therapeutic agent |
US10202751B2 (en) | 2012-03-09 | 2019-02-12 | Halliburton Energy Services, Inc. | Set-delayed cement compositions comprising pumice and associated methods |
US10195764B2 (en) | 2012-03-09 | 2019-02-05 | Halliburton Energy Services, Inc. | Set-delayed cement compositions comprising pumice and associated methods |
US9790132B2 (en) | 2012-03-09 | 2017-10-17 | Halliburton Energy Services, Inc. | Set-delayed cement compositions comprising pumice and associated methods |
US8851173B2 (en) | 2012-03-09 | 2014-10-07 | Halliburton Energy Services, Inc. | Set-delayed cement compositions comprising pumice and associated methods |
JP6178399B2 (en) * | 2012-03-16 | 2017-08-09 | ベンデル アナリティカル ホールディング ビー.ブイ.Bender Analytical Holding B.V. | Crosslinked polymers derived from nucleophilically activated polyoxazolines and medical products |
EP2825207B1 (en) | 2012-03-16 | 2020-08-19 | The Johns Hopkins University | Non-linear multiblock copolymer-drug conjugates for the delivery of active agents |
WO2013138343A1 (en) | 2012-03-16 | 2013-09-19 | The Johns Hopkins University | Controlled release formulations for the delivery of hif-1 inhibitors |
WO2013158781A1 (en) | 2012-04-18 | 2013-10-24 | Microvention, Inc. | Embolic devices |
US8999292B2 (en) | 2012-05-01 | 2015-04-07 | Translatum Medicus Inc. | Methods for treating and diagnosing blinding eye diseases |
US9533068B2 (en) * | 2012-05-04 | 2017-01-03 | The Johns Hopkins University | Drug loaded microfiber sutures for ophthalmic application |
CA2873105C (en) | 2012-05-11 | 2018-01-16 | Medicus Biosciences, Llc | Biocompatible hydrogel treatments for retinal detachment |
US9180242B2 (en) | 2012-05-17 | 2015-11-10 | Tandem Diabetes Care, Inc. | Methods and devices for multiple fluid transfer |
NL2008861C2 (en) * | 2012-05-23 | 2013-11-26 | Urogyn B V | Composition for soft tissue treatment. |
US9132171B2 (en) | 2012-05-23 | 2015-09-15 | Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation | Test of insulin as a drug to reduce restenosis of vessels |
EP3984556A1 (en) | 2012-06-14 | 2022-04-20 | Microvention, Inc. | Polymeric treatment compositions |
WO2014022807A2 (en) * | 2012-08-03 | 2014-02-06 | Alumend, Llc | Compositions and methods of using the compositions for plaque softening |
CN104717983B (en) | 2012-10-15 | 2018-09-18 | 微仙美国有限公司 | It polymerize therapeutic combination |
US9220807B2 (en) * | 2012-11-04 | 2015-12-29 | Miba Medical Inc. | Non-toxic cross-linker for hyaluronic acid |
WO2014113450A1 (en) * | 2013-01-16 | 2014-07-24 | Alumend, Llc | Decreasing inflammatory response in a blood vessel |
US20140212355A1 (en) | 2013-01-28 | 2014-07-31 | Abbott Cardiovascular Systems Inc. | Trans-arterial drug delivery |
WO2014124006A1 (en) | 2013-02-05 | 2014-08-14 | The Johns Hopkins University | Nanoparticles for magnetic resonance imaging tracking and methods of making and using thereof |
EP2953992B1 (en) | 2013-02-06 | 2021-11-24 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Polymers, preparation and use thereof |
EP2964184B1 (en) | 2013-03-04 | 2018-05-09 | Dermelle, Llc D/b/a Eternogen, LLC | Injectable in situ polymerizable collagen composition |
JP6525952B2 (en) | 2013-03-14 | 2019-06-05 | メディカス バイオサイエンシーズ エルエルシー | Biocompatible hydrogel polymer matrix for cell delivery |
US10624865B2 (en) | 2013-03-14 | 2020-04-21 | Pathak Holdings Llc | Methods, compositions, and devices for drug/live cell microarrays |
US9173998B2 (en) | 2013-03-14 | 2015-11-03 | Tandem Diabetes Care, Inc. | System and method for detecting occlusions in an infusion pump |
US10188824B2 (en) * | 2013-05-13 | 2019-01-29 | The Arizona Board Of Regents On Behalf Of The University Of Arizona | Aerostasis in pulmonary surgery |
CN106061253A (en) * | 2013-12-18 | 2016-10-26 | 温德加普医疗股份有限公司 | Drug mixing and delivery system and method |
US9682218B2 (en) | 2013-12-23 | 2017-06-20 | Carefusion 2200, Inc. | Pleurodesis device and method |
US10124090B2 (en) | 2014-04-03 | 2018-11-13 | Terumo Corporation | Embolic devices |
US9259357B2 (en) | 2014-04-16 | 2016-02-16 | Loma Linda University | Composition, preparation, and use of chitosan shards for biomedical applications |
US10092663B2 (en) | 2014-04-29 | 2018-10-09 | Terumo Corporation | Polymers |
WO2015167752A1 (en) | 2014-04-29 | 2015-11-05 | Microvention, Inc. | Polymers including active agents |
US10022475B2 (en) * | 2014-05-01 | 2018-07-17 | Bao Tran | Body augmentation device |
CA2955048C (en) | 2014-07-14 | 2020-11-03 | University Of Utah Research Foundation | In situ solidifying compositions and methods of making and using therof |
EP3174564A1 (en) * | 2014-07-30 | 2017-06-07 | Lifecell Corporation | Methods for selection of age-appropriate tissues |
JP6683398B2 (en) | 2014-10-06 | 2020-04-22 | ガット テクノロジーズ ビー.ブイ.Gatt Technologies B.V. | Tissue adhesive porous hemostatic product |
CN107106509B (en) | 2014-12-18 | 2021-11-30 | 帝斯曼知识产权资产管理有限公司 | Drug delivery system for delivering acid sensitive drugs |
JP2017538731A (en) | 2014-12-18 | 2017-12-28 | ウィンドギャップ メディカル, インコーポレイテッド | Methods and compositions for dissolving or solubilizing therapeutic agents. |
CN105561404B (en) * | 2015-01-07 | 2019-07-26 | 北京赛奇科科技有限公司 | A kind of medical material and preparation method thereof to prevent adhesion for gynemetrics |
WO2016123125A1 (en) | 2015-01-27 | 2016-08-04 | The Johns Hopkins University | Hypotonic hydrogel formulations for enhanced transport of active agents at mucosal surfaces |
CN106264777A (en) * | 2015-06-08 | 2017-01-04 | 三鼎生物科技股份有限公司 | Auxiliary dacryagogue |
WO2016201250A1 (en) | 2015-06-11 | 2016-12-15 | Microvention, Inc. | Expansile device for implantation |
US10368874B2 (en) | 2016-08-26 | 2019-08-06 | Microvention, Inc. | Embolic compositions |
WO2018106777A1 (en) * | 2016-12-07 | 2018-06-14 | Henkel IP & Holding GmbH | Syringe with piston assembly |
CN110381854A (en) * | 2017-01-05 | 2019-10-25 | 考恩特兰有限公司 | Method for being implanted into and reversing stimulating responsive implantation material |
US10912859B2 (en) | 2017-03-08 | 2021-02-09 | Baxter International Inc. | Additive able to provide underwater adhesion |
US11202848B2 (en) | 2017-03-08 | 2021-12-21 | Baxter International Inc. | Surgical adhesive able to glue in wet conditions |
CN111200976B (en) | 2017-10-09 | 2023-07-07 | 微仙美国有限公司 | Radioactive liquid embolism |
US10709815B2 (en) * | 2017-10-16 | 2020-07-14 | Kent State University | Biodegradable, biocompatible 3D liquid crystal elastomeric foam scaffolds having tailor-made animal (human) pore cell sizes via a salt leaching method are capable of growing tissue therein for therapeutic reconstruction of damaged and/or diseased tissue or organs |
KR101989054B1 (en) * | 2017-11-28 | 2019-06-13 | (주)다림티센 | Hemostatic agent and container containing the same |
CA3089480A1 (en) | 2018-01-26 | 2019-08-01 | Fluidx Medical Technology, Llc | Apparatus and method of using in situ solidifying complex coacervates for vascular occlusion |
CN108211909B (en) * | 2018-03-05 | 2024-02-06 | 常城 | Dyeing paste mixing device for dyeing hair and dyeing method thereof capable of keeping dyeing consistency |
CN108744060B (en) * | 2018-05-29 | 2021-05-07 | 四川大学 | Bone repair material capable of being injected with multiple pore structures and preparation method thereof |
CN109045354B (en) * | 2018-07-26 | 2020-12-08 | 华中科技大学 | In-situ forming injectable hydrogel for comprehensive repair of bone-cartilage |
CN112807482B (en) * | 2018-08-20 | 2022-07-29 | 稳得希林(杭州)生物科技有限公司 | Polysaccharide-based tissue adhesive medical adhesive and application thereof |
US20220125736A1 (en) * | 2019-02-06 | 2022-04-28 | The University Of North Carolina At Chapel Hill | Compositions and methods for inhibiting post-surgical adhesions |
CA3135980A1 (en) * | 2019-03-05 | 2020-09-10 | Medcura, Inc. | System and method to reduce tissue or organ adhesion |
US20220211683A1 (en) * | 2019-05-09 | 2022-07-07 | The University Of Chicago | Novel material for skin wound closure and scar prevention |
US11753382B2 (en) | 2019-06-25 | 2023-09-12 | Translatum Medicus Inc. | Processes of making 2-((1-benzyl-1H-indazol-3-yl)methoxy)-2-methylpropanoic acid and its derivatives |
ES2950186T3 (en) * | 2019-07-12 | 2023-10-05 | Gatt Tech B V | Hemostatic, flexible and biocompatible sheet |
CN112730015B (en) * | 2019-10-28 | 2022-11-22 | 上海云泽生物科技有限公司 | Dilution for stabilizing tacrolimus and application thereof |
CN115052641A (en) * | 2020-02-04 | 2022-09-13 | 波士顿科学国际有限公司 | Injectable in vivo cross-linking material for use as soft tissue filler |
SE2050826A1 (en) * | 2020-07-02 | 2022-01-03 | Capitainer Ab | Functionalized blood sampling device and method for peth measurement |
US11739166B2 (en) | 2020-07-02 | 2023-08-29 | Davol Inc. | Reactive polysaccharide-based hemostatic agent |
CN112129946A (en) * | 2020-08-16 | 2020-12-25 | 陆修委 | Preparation method and application of sugar-free chain type inert protein sealant |
US11339045B2 (en) | 2020-10-20 | 2022-05-24 | Elkay Manufacturing Company | Flavor and additive delivery systems and methods for beverage dispensers |
WO2022130103A1 (en) * | 2020-12-18 | 2022-06-23 | Ethicon, Inc. | Methods and devices for changing the flow rates of ph modifying fluids for controlling cross-linking rates of reactive components of biocompatible sealing compositions |
CN112705054B (en) * | 2020-12-24 | 2022-06-24 | 健帆生物科技集团股份有限公司 | Hollow fiber membrane, preparation method thereof and dialyzer |
CN113018461B (en) * | 2021-03-09 | 2022-07-26 | 南京邮电大学 | Fucoidin embolism microsphere capable of magnetic resonance imaging and preparation method thereof |
US20230256134A1 (en) * | 2021-04-14 | 2023-08-17 | Beijing Biosis Healing Biological Technology Co., Ltd. | Medical Hydrogel and Preparation Method and Uses thereof |
CN113101039B (en) * | 2021-04-26 | 2022-10-18 | 金浙滔 | Oviduct contraceptive device, implanting device and extracting device |
CN113416292B (en) * | 2021-04-30 | 2022-07-19 | 山东师范大学 | Hydrogel capable of loading high-hydrophobicity drugs and preparation method and application thereof |
CN113846054B (en) * | 2021-09-23 | 2023-05-16 | 四川大学 | Matrix material for directly reprogramming fibroblast into osteoblast, preparation method and reprogramming method |
CN114099784B (en) * | 2021-10-26 | 2022-09-16 | 四川兴科蓉药业有限责任公司 | Injection type skin filling composition and preparation method and application thereof |
CN114740690A (en) * | 2022-03-04 | 2022-07-12 | 西南大学 | All-water-based silk photoresist based on silk and tussah silk and preparation method thereof |
WO2024042535A1 (en) * | 2022-08-20 | 2024-02-29 | Jawaharlal Nehru Centre For Advanced Scientific Research | Hemostatic composite, its method and applications thereof |
CN115403723B (en) * | 2022-08-24 | 2023-10-13 | 中原工学院 | Preparation method and application of lithium anode modified based on covalent organic framework material |
CN116448996B (en) * | 2023-03-22 | 2023-11-21 | 卡秋(江苏)生物科技有限公司 | Preparation method of polymerase-antibody complex with bead structure |
CN116570757B (en) * | 2023-07-05 | 2023-10-03 | 北京镧系生物科技有限公司 | Double-component in-situ adhesive based on super-charged protein, and preparation method and application thereof |
CN117504137B (en) * | 2024-01-05 | 2024-03-12 | 山东瑞安泰医疗技术有限公司 | Cardiac pacemaker fixing device and preparation method thereof |
Citations (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20010003126A1 (en) * | 1995-10-05 | 2001-06-07 | Rhee Woonza M. | Method of making crosslinked polymer matrices in tissue treatment applications |
WO2002102864A1 (en) * | 2001-06-15 | 2002-12-27 | Cohesion Technologies, Inc. | Compositions and systems for forming crosslinked biomaterials and associated methods of preparation and use |
WO2003080144A1 (en) * | 2002-03-22 | 2003-10-02 | Kuros Biosurgery Ag | Composition for hard tissue augmentation |
Family Cites Families (194)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US3091542A (en) | 1960-09-20 | 1963-05-28 | Dow Chemical Co | Insolubilization of water-soluble cellulose ethers |
NL126192C (en) | 1964-07-16 | |||
US3619371A (en) | 1967-07-03 | 1971-11-09 | Nat Res Dev | Production of a polymeric matrix having a biologically active substance bound thereto |
SE343210B (en) | 1967-12-20 | 1972-03-06 | Pharmacia Ab | |
US4008341A (en) * | 1968-10-11 | 1977-02-15 | W. R. Grace & Co. | Curable liquid polymer compositions |
US3742955A (en) | 1970-09-29 | 1973-07-03 | Fmc Corp | Fibrous collagen derived product having hemostatic and wound binding properties |
US3810473A (en) | 1972-12-04 | 1974-05-14 | Avicon Inc | Liquid-laid, non-woven, fibrous collagen derived surgical web having hemostatic and wound sealing properties |
US3876501A (en) | 1973-05-17 | 1975-04-08 | Baxter Laboratories Inc | Binding enzymes to activated water-soluble carbohydrates |
GB1479268A (en) | 1973-07-05 | 1977-07-13 | Beecham Group Ltd | Pharmaceutical compositions |
US4179337A (en) | 1973-07-20 | 1979-12-18 | Davis Frank F | Non-immunogenic polypeptides |
DE2360794C2 (en) | 1973-12-06 | 1984-12-06 | Hoechst Ag, 6230 Frankfurt | Process for the production of peptides |
US3949073A (en) | 1974-11-18 | 1976-04-06 | The Board Of Trustees Of Leland Stanford Junior University | Process for augmenting connective mammalian tissue with in situ polymerizable native collagen solution |
CH596313A5 (en) | 1975-05-30 | 1978-03-15 | Battelle Memorial Institute | |
US4237229A (en) * | 1975-06-10 | 1980-12-02 | W. R. Grace & Co. | Immobilization of biological material with polyurethane polymers |
IL47468A (en) | 1975-06-12 | 1979-05-31 | Rehovot Res Prod | Process for the cross-linking of proteins using water soluble cross-linking agents |
US4488911A (en) | 1975-10-22 | 1984-12-18 | Luck Edward E | Non-antigenic collagen and articles of manufacture |
US4002531A (en) | 1976-01-22 | 1977-01-11 | Pierce Chemical Company | Modifying enzymes with polyethylene glycol and product produced thereby |
NL7704659A (en) | 1976-05-12 | 1977-11-15 | Battelle Institut E V | BONE REPLACEMENT, BONE JOINT, OR PROSTHESIS ANCHORING MATERIAL. |
GB1578348A (en) | 1976-08-17 | 1980-11-05 | Pharmacia Ab | Products and a method for the therapeutic suppression of reaginic antibodies responsible for common allergic |
SE431758B (en) * | 1977-03-04 | 1984-02-27 | Pharmacia Fine Chemicals Ab | AS THE USE OF THE TIOLATION REAGENT OR BERRY MATRIX FOR ENZYMERS DERIVATIVE OF A SH GROUPING POLYMER |
CH628074A5 (en) | 1977-03-10 | 1982-02-15 | Ciba Geigy Ag | HARDENABLE MIXTURES BASED ON EPOXY COMPOUNDS. |
US4164559A (en) | 1977-09-21 | 1979-08-14 | Cornell Research Foundation, Inc. | Collagen drug delivery device |
US4404970A (en) | 1978-05-19 | 1983-09-20 | Sawyer Philip Nicholas | Hemostatic article and methods for preparing and employing the same |
US4238480A (en) | 1978-05-19 | 1980-12-09 | Sawyer Philip Nicholas | Method for preparing an improved hemostatic agent and method of employing the same |
US4390519A (en) | 1978-05-19 | 1983-06-28 | Sawyer Philip Nicholas | Bandage with hemostatic agent and methods for preparing and employing the same |
FR2449610A1 (en) | 1979-01-02 | 1980-09-19 | Remy Ets Pierre | INVIOLABLE STOPPING PROCESS FOR SCREW BOTTLE |
JPS6023084B2 (en) | 1979-07-11 | 1985-06-05 | 味の素株式会社 | blood substitute |
US4412947A (en) | 1979-09-12 | 1983-11-01 | Seton Company | Collagen sponge |
US4279812A (en) | 1979-09-12 | 1981-07-21 | Seton Company | Process for preparing macromolecular biologically active collagen |
DE2943520C2 (en) | 1979-10-27 | 1982-05-19 | Fa. Carl Freudenberg, 6940 Weinheim | Process for the production of collagen sponge for medical or cosmetic purposes |
US4378017A (en) | 1980-03-21 | 1983-03-29 | Kureha Kagaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha | Composite material of de-N-acetylated chitin and fibrous collagen |
CS216992B1 (en) | 1980-07-21 | 1982-12-31 | Miroslav Stol | Composite polymere material for the biological and medicinal utilitation and method of preparation thereof |
US4314380A (en) | 1980-09-26 | 1982-02-09 | Koken Co., Ltd. | Artificial bone |
US4415665A (en) | 1980-12-12 | 1983-11-15 | Pharmacia Fine Chemicals Ab | Method of covalently binding biologically active organic substances to polymeric substances |
US4414147A (en) | 1981-04-17 | 1983-11-08 | Massachusetts Institute Of Technology | Methods of decreasing the hydrophobicity of fibroblast and other interferons |
JPS57206622A (en) | 1981-06-10 | 1982-12-18 | Ajinomoto Co Inc | Blood substitute |
EP0067671B1 (en) * | 1981-06-12 | 1989-11-15 | National Research Development Corporation | Hydrogels |
US4451568A (en) | 1981-07-13 | 1984-05-29 | Battelle Memorial Institute | Composition for binding bioactive substances |
US4357274A (en) | 1981-08-06 | 1982-11-02 | Intermedicat Gmbh | Process for the manufacture of sclero protein transplants with increased biological stability |
US4415628A (en) | 1981-10-26 | 1983-11-15 | Seton Company | Moisture vapor permeable sheet materials |
JPS5896026A (en) | 1981-10-30 | 1983-06-07 | Nippon Chemiphar Co Ltd | Novel urokinase derivative, its preparation and thrombolytic agent containing the same |
FR2517315B1 (en) | 1981-11-30 | 1985-12-20 | Tech Cuir Centre | PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF NEW FORMS OF COLLAGEN, NATIVE OR DERETICULATED, WITH PRESERVED HELICOIDAL STRUCTURE, ASSOCIATED WITH MUCOPOLYSACCHARIDES AND THEIR APPLICATIONS IN PARTICULAR IN THE COSMETOLOGICAL, PHARMACEUTICAL, ANALYTICAL AND OTHER FIELDS |
US4424208A (en) | 1982-01-11 | 1984-01-03 | Collagen Corporation | Collagen implant material and method for augmenting soft tissue |
US4582640A (en) | 1982-03-08 | 1986-04-15 | Collagen Corporation | Injectable cross-linked collagen implant material |
US4578067A (en) | 1982-04-12 | 1986-03-25 | Alcon (Puerto Rico) Inc. | Hemostatic-adhesive, collagen dressing for severed biological surfaces |
JPS58180162A (en) | 1982-04-19 | 1983-10-21 | 株式会社高研 | Anti-thrombosis medical material |
US4461298A (en) * | 1982-07-26 | 1984-07-24 | Ethicon, Inc. | Composite sutures of silk and hydrophobic thermoplastic elastomers |
US4544516A (en) | 1982-07-28 | 1985-10-01 | Battelle Development Corporation | Collagen orientation |
US4737544A (en) | 1982-08-12 | 1988-04-12 | Biospecific Technologies, Inc. | Biospecific polymers |
US4973493A (en) | 1982-09-29 | 1990-11-27 | Bio-Metric Systems, Inc. | Method of improving the biocompatibility of solid surfaces |
JPS6028936A (en) | 1983-07-27 | 1985-02-14 | Koken:Kk | Atherocollagen aqueous solution and its preparation |
US4563351A (en) | 1983-08-01 | 1986-01-07 | Forsyth Dental Infirmary For Children | Self-gelling therapeutic compositions for topical application |
US4448718A (en) | 1983-09-13 | 1984-05-15 | Massachusetts Institute Of Technology | Method for the preparation of collagen-glycosaminoglycan composite materials |
US4515637A (en) | 1983-11-16 | 1985-05-07 | Seton Company | Collagen-thrombin compositions |
US4487865A (en) | 1983-12-15 | 1984-12-11 | Biomatrix, Inc. | Polymeric articles modified with hyaluronate |
US4496689A (en) | 1983-12-27 | 1985-01-29 | Miles Laboratories, Inc. | Covalently attached complex of alpha-1-proteinase inhibitor with a water soluble polymer |
CA1295796C (en) | 1984-03-27 | 1992-02-18 | Conrad Whyne | Biodegradable matrix and methods for producing same |
US4789663A (en) | 1984-07-06 | 1988-12-06 | Collagen Corporation | Methods of bone repair using collagen |
JPS6145765A (en) | 1984-08-07 | 1986-03-05 | 宇部興産株式会社 | Blood vessel prosthesis and its production |
US4553974A (en) | 1984-08-14 | 1985-11-19 | Mayo Foundation | Treatment of collagenous tissue with glutaraldehyde and aminodiphosphonate calcification inhibitor |
US4687820A (en) | 1984-08-22 | 1987-08-18 | Cuno Incorporated | Modified polypeptide supports |
US4557764A (en) | 1984-09-05 | 1985-12-10 | Collagen Corporation | Process for preparing malleable collagen and the product thereof |
US4888366A (en) | 1984-10-24 | 1989-12-19 | Collagen Corporation | Inductive collagen-based bone repair preparations |
US4563350A (en) | 1984-10-24 | 1986-01-07 | Collagen Corporation | Inductive collagen based bone repair preparations |
GB8430252D0 (en) | 1984-11-30 | 1985-01-09 | Beecham Group Plc | Compounds |
US5128326A (en) | 1984-12-06 | 1992-07-07 | Biomatrix, Inc. | Drug delivery systems based on hyaluronans derivatives thereof and their salts and methods of producing same |
US4582865A (en) | 1984-12-06 | 1986-04-15 | Biomatrix, Inc. | Cross-linked gels of hyaluronic acid and products containing such gels |
US4600533A (en) | 1984-12-24 | 1986-07-15 | Collagen Corporation | Collagen membranes for medical use |
US4732863A (en) | 1984-12-31 | 1988-03-22 | University Of New Mexico | PEG-modified antibody with reduced affinity for cell surface Fc receptors |
US4636526A (en) | 1985-02-19 | 1987-01-13 | The Dow Chemical Company | Composites of unsintered calcium phosphates and synthetic biodegradable polymers useful as hard tissue prosthetics |
US4695602A (en) | 1985-02-28 | 1987-09-22 | Lnp Corporation | Fiber reinforced thermoplastics containing silicone interpenetrating polymer networks |
US4839345A (en) * | 1985-03-09 | 1989-06-13 | Nippon Oil And Fats Co., Ltd. | Hydrated adhesive gel and method for preparing the same |
US5099013A (en) | 1985-03-12 | 1992-03-24 | Biomatrix, Inc, | Hylan preparation and method of recovery thereof from animal tissues |
US4642117A (en) | 1985-03-22 | 1987-02-10 | Collagen Corporation | Mechanically sheared collagen implant material and method |
CA1260391A (en) | 1985-03-28 | 1989-09-26 | Karl A. Piez | Xenogeneic collagen/mineral preparations in bone repair |
DE3521684A1 (en) | 1985-06-18 | 1986-12-18 | Dr. Müller-Lierheim KG, Biologische Laboratorien, 8033 Planegg | METHOD FOR COATING POLYMERS |
EP0206448B1 (en) | 1985-06-19 | 1990-11-14 | Ajinomoto Co., Inc. | Hemoglobin combined with a poly(alkylene oxide) |
US4766106A (en) | 1985-06-26 | 1988-08-23 | Cetus Corporation | Solubilization of proteins for pharmaceutical compositions using polymer conjugation |
US5202431A (en) | 1985-07-08 | 1993-04-13 | Fidia, S.P.A. | Partial esters of hyaluronic acid |
US4851513A (en) | 1985-09-06 | 1989-07-25 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Viscoelastic collagen solution for opthalmic use and method of preparation |
JPS63502354A (en) | 1986-01-06 | 1988-09-08 | ザ ユニヴァーシティ オブ メルボルン | collagen products |
US4774227A (en) | 1986-02-14 | 1988-09-27 | Collagen Corporation | Collagen compositions for bone repair containing autogeneic marrow |
ES2004281A6 (en) | 1986-04-04 | 1988-12-16 | Univ Jefferson | Method of treating a synthetic naturally occurring surface with a collagen laminate to support microvascular endothelial cell growth, and the surface itself |
US4983580A (en) | 1986-04-04 | 1991-01-08 | Allergan, Inc. | Methods and materials for use in corneal wound healing |
US4745180A (en) | 1986-06-27 | 1988-05-17 | Cetus Corporation | Solubilization of proteins for pharmaceutical compositions using heparin fragments |
US4979959A (en) | 1986-10-17 | 1990-12-25 | Bio-Metric Systems, Inc. | Biocompatible coating for solid surfaces |
US4865602A (en) | 1986-11-06 | 1989-09-12 | Collagen Corporation | Gamma irradiation of collagen/mineral mixtures |
FR2616318A1 (en) | 1987-06-15 | 1988-12-16 | Centre Nat Rech Scient | ARTIFICIAL SKIN AND PROCESS FOR PREPARING THE SAME |
US4829099A (en) * | 1987-07-17 | 1989-05-09 | Bioresearch, Inc. | Metabolically acceptable polyisocyanate adhesives |
US5017229A (en) | 1990-06-25 | 1991-05-21 | Genzyme Corporation | Water insoluble derivatives of hyaluronic acid |
US6030958A (en) * | 1987-09-18 | 2000-02-29 | Genzyme Corporation | Water insoluble derivatives of hyaluronic acid |
US6174999B1 (en) * | 1987-09-18 | 2001-01-16 | Genzyme Corporation | Water insoluble derivatives of polyanionic polysaccharides |
US6235726B1 (en) * | 1987-09-18 | 2001-05-22 | Genzyme Corporation | Water insoluble derivatives of polyanionic polysaccharides |
US4937270A (en) | 1987-09-18 | 1990-06-26 | Genzyme Corporation | Water insoluble derivatives of hyaluronic acid |
US5364622A (en) | 1987-12-04 | 1994-11-15 | Dr. Karl Thomae Gmbh | Methods for preventing adhesions to organs and parts of organs by application of tissue plasminogen activator and hydroxyethylcellulose hydrogel |
US4886866A (en) * | 1987-12-21 | 1989-12-12 | W. R. Grace & Co.-Conn. | Contact lenses based on biocompatible polyurethane and polyurea-urethane hydrated polymers |
US4950699A (en) | 1988-01-11 | 1990-08-21 | Genetic Laboratories, Inc. | Wound dressing incorporating collagen in adhesive layer |
US4847325A (en) | 1988-01-20 | 1989-07-11 | Cetus Corporation | Conjugation of polymer to colony stimulating factor-1 |
US5192316A (en) | 1988-02-16 | 1993-03-09 | Allergan, Inc. | Ocular device |
US5024742A (en) | 1988-02-24 | 1991-06-18 | Cedars-Sinai Medical Center | Method of crosslinking amino acid containing polymers using photoactivatable chemical crosslinkers |
US5156622A (en) | 1988-03-02 | 1992-10-20 | Thompson Keith P | Apparatus and process for application and adjustable reprofiling of synthetic lenticules for vision correction |
US4923467A (en) | 1988-03-02 | 1990-05-08 | Thompson Keith P | Apparatus and process for application and adjustable reprofiling of synthetic lenticules for vision correction |
FR2628634B1 (en) | 1988-03-15 | 1990-07-13 | Imedex | VISCERAL SURGERY PATCH |
JPH01265970A (en) | 1988-04-19 | 1989-10-24 | Shiseido Co Ltd | Collagen water solution or water dispersion solution including hyaluronic acid |
US5290552A (en) | 1988-05-02 | 1994-03-01 | Matrix Pharmaceutical, Inc./Project Hear | Surgical adhesive material |
US4950483A (en) | 1988-06-30 | 1990-08-21 | Collagen Corporation | Collagen wound healing matrices and process for their production |
US5167960A (en) | 1988-08-03 | 1992-12-01 | New England Deaconess Hospital Corporation | Hirudin-coated biocompatible substance |
US5527856A (en) * | 1988-11-21 | 1996-06-18 | Collagen Corporation | Method of preparing crosslinked biomaterial compositions for use in tissue augmentation |
US5936035A (en) * | 1988-11-21 | 1999-08-10 | Cohesion Technologies, Inc. | Biocompatible adhesive compositions |
US5550187A (en) * | 1988-11-21 | 1996-08-27 | Collagen Corporation | Method of preparing crosslinked biomaterial compositions for use in tissue augmentation |
US5162430A (en) | 1988-11-21 | 1992-11-10 | Collagen Corporation | Collagen-polymer conjugates |
US5475052A (en) | 1988-11-21 | 1995-12-12 | Collagen Corporation | Collagen-synthetic polymer matrices prepared using a multiple step reaction |
US5510418A (en) * | 1988-11-21 | 1996-04-23 | Collagen Corporation | Glycosaminoglycan-synthetic polymer conjugates |
US5306500A (en) | 1988-11-21 | 1994-04-26 | Collagen Corporation | Method of augmenting tissue with collagen-polymer conjugates |
US5614587A (en) | 1988-11-21 | 1997-03-25 | Collagen Corporation | Collagen-based bioadhesive compositions |
US5264214A (en) | 1988-11-21 | 1993-11-23 | Collagen Corporation | Composition for bone repair |
US5565519A (en) * | 1988-11-21 | 1996-10-15 | Collagen Corporation | Clear, chemically modified collagen-synthetic polymer conjugates for ophthalmic applications |
US5304595A (en) | 1988-11-21 | 1994-04-19 | Collagen Corporation | Collagen-polymer conjugates |
US5643464A (en) * | 1988-11-21 | 1997-07-01 | Collagen Corporation | Process for preparing a sterile, dry crosslinking agent |
DE3903672C1 (en) * | 1989-02-08 | 1990-02-01 | Lohmann Gmbh & Co Kg | |
US5324844A (en) | 1989-04-19 | 1994-06-28 | Enzon, Inc. | Active carbonates of polyalkylene oxides for modification of polypeptides |
US5122614A (en) | 1989-04-19 | 1992-06-16 | Enzon, Inc. | Active carbonates of polyalkylene oxides for modification of polypeptides |
US5141747A (en) | 1989-05-23 | 1992-08-25 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Denatured collagen membrane |
US5201764A (en) | 1990-02-28 | 1993-04-13 | Autogenesis Technologies, Inc. | Biologically compatible collagenous reaction product and articles useful as medical implants produced therefrom |
US5104957A (en) | 1990-02-28 | 1992-04-14 | Autogenesis Technologies, Inc. | Biologically compatible collagenous reaction product and articles useful as medical implants produced therefrom |
JP3210009B2 (en) | 1990-04-02 | 2001-09-17 | ザ、プロクター、エンド、ギャンブル、カンパニー | Granular absorbent polymer composition containing interparticle crosslinked aggregates |
US5196027A (en) | 1990-05-02 | 1993-03-23 | Thompson Keith P | Apparatus and process for application and adjustable reprofiling of synthetic lenticules for vision correction |
US5204110A (en) * | 1990-05-02 | 1993-04-20 | Ndm Acquisition Corp. | High absorbency hydrogel wound dressing |
US5219564A (en) | 1990-07-06 | 1993-06-15 | Enzon, Inc. | Poly(alkylene oxide) amino acid copolymers and drug carriers and charged copolymers based thereon |
US5209776A (en) | 1990-07-27 | 1993-05-11 | The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Of New York | Tissue bonding and sealing composition and method of using the same |
US5292362A (en) | 1990-07-27 | 1994-03-08 | The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Of New York | Tissue bonding and sealing composition and method of using the same |
SE466754B (en) | 1990-09-13 | 1992-03-30 | Berol Nobel Ab | COVALENT BINDING POLYMERS TO HYDROPHILIC SURFACES |
US5131875A (en) | 1990-10-12 | 1992-07-21 | Lee Warren D | Dual motor control and steering system for watercraft |
US5410016A (en) | 1990-10-15 | 1995-04-25 | Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System | Photopolymerizable biodegradable hydrogels as tissue contacting materials and controlled-release carriers |
US5626863A (en) | 1992-02-28 | 1997-05-06 | Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System | Photopolymerizable biodegradable hydrogels as tissue contacting materials and controlled-release carriers |
US5169754A (en) | 1990-10-31 | 1992-12-08 | Coulter Corporation | Biodegradable particle coatings having a protein covalently immobilized by means of a crosslinking agent and processes for making same |
US5163956A (en) | 1990-11-06 | 1992-11-17 | General Electric Company | Methods and lenticules for modifying the cornea |
US6559119B1 (en) * | 1990-11-27 | 2003-05-06 | Loyola University Of Chicago | Method of preparing a tissue sealant-treated biomedical material |
US5219895A (en) | 1991-01-29 | 1993-06-15 | Autogenesis Technologies, Inc. | Collagen-based adhesives and sealants and methods of preparation and use thereof |
US5156613A (en) | 1991-02-13 | 1992-10-20 | Interface Biomedical Laboratories Corp. | Collagen welding rod material for use in tissue welding |
US5208219A (en) | 1991-02-14 | 1993-05-04 | Celtrix Pharmaceuticals Inc. | Method for inducing bone growth |
US5118667A (en) | 1991-05-03 | 1992-06-02 | Celtrix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Bone growth factors and inhibitors of bone resorption for promoting bone formation |
EP0610441A4 (en) | 1991-10-29 | 1996-01-10 | Clover Cons Ltd | Crosslinkable polysaccharides, polycations and lipids useful for encapsulation and drug release. |
WO1993008818A1 (en) | 1991-11-07 | 1993-05-13 | The University Of Southern California | Compositions and methods for preventing adhesion formation |
WO1993010163A2 (en) * | 1991-11-12 | 1993-05-27 | Nepera, Inc. | Adhesive hydrogels having extended use lives and process for the preparation of same |
US5147374A (en) * | 1991-12-05 | 1992-09-15 | Alfredo Fernandez | Prosthetic mesh patch for hernia repair |
US5176692A (en) * | 1991-12-09 | 1993-01-05 | Wilk Peter J | Method and surgical instrument for repairing hernia |
US5385606A (en) | 1992-07-06 | 1995-01-31 | Kowanko; Nicholas | Adhesive composition and method |
US5428022A (en) * | 1992-07-29 | 1995-06-27 | Collagen Corporation | Composition of low type III content human placental collagen |
US5514379A (en) | 1992-08-07 | 1996-05-07 | The General Hospital Corporation | Hydrogel compositions and methods of use |
US5614549A (en) | 1992-08-21 | 1997-03-25 | Enzon, Inc. | High molecular weight polymer-based prodrugs |
AU675252B2 (en) * | 1992-12-18 | 1997-01-30 | Tremco, Inc. | Fast-curing, high strength, two-part sealants using acetoacetate-amine cure chemistry |
US5298643A (en) | 1992-12-22 | 1994-03-29 | Enzon, Inc. | Aryl imidate activated polyalkylene oxides |
US5349001A (en) | 1993-01-19 | 1994-09-20 | Enzon, Inc. | Cyclic imide thione activated polyalkylene oxides |
US5667839A (en) * | 1993-01-28 | 1997-09-16 | Collagen Corporation | Human recombinant collagen in the milk of transgenic animals |
US5321095A (en) | 1993-02-02 | 1994-06-14 | Enzon, Inc. | Azlactone activated polyalkylene oxides |
US5549904A (en) | 1993-06-03 | 1996-08-27 | Orthogene, Inc. | Biological adhesive composition and method of promoting adhesion between tissue surfaces |
FR2707878A1 (en) | 1993-07-21 | 1995-01-27 | Imedex | New adhesive compositions for surgical use. |
FR2707992B1 (en) * | 1993-07-21 | 1995-10-13 | Flamel Tech Sa | New organic products containing reactive thiol functions, one of their preparation processes and the biomaterials containing them. |
US5939385A (en) | 1993-08-13 | 1999-08-17 | Zymogenetics, Inc. | Transglutaminase cross-linkable polypeptides and methods relating thereto |
DE69432707T2 (en) * | 1993-09-16 | 2004-01-15 | Ogita Biomaterial Lab Co Ltd | Wound-covering material and wound-covering composition |
US5643575A (en) | 1993-10-27 | 1997-07-01 | Enzon, Inc. | Non-antigenic branched polymer conjugates |
US5605976A (en) | 1995-05-15 | 1997-02-25 | Enzon, Inc. | Method of preparing polyalkylene oxide carboxylic acids |
ES2172573T3 (en) * | 1993-12-01 | 2002-10-01 | Bioartificial Gel Technologies Inc | ALBUMIN BASED HYDROGEL. |
FR2715309B1 (en) | 1994-01-24 | 1996-08-02 | Imedex | Adhesive composition, for surgical use, based on collagen modified by oxidative cutting and not crosslinked. |
US5578661A (en) * | 1994-03-31 | 1996-11-26 | Nepera, Inc. | Gel forming system for use as wound dressings |
US5505952A (en) | 1994-04-19 | 1996-04-09 | United States Surgical Corporation | Modified synthetic cross-linked amino acid polymers and medical devices formed therefrom |
US5583114A (en) * | 1994-07-27 | 1996-12-10 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Adhesive sealant composition |
FR2726571B1 (en) * | 1994-11-03 | 1997-08-08 | Izoret Georges | BIOLOGICAL GLUE, PREPARATION METHOD AND APPLICATION DEVICE FOR BIOLOGICAL GLUE, AND HARDENERS FOR BIOLOGICAL GLUE |
CA2167455A1 (en) | 1995-01-19 | 1996-07-20 | Kevin Cooper | Absorbable polyalkylene diglycolates |
US5550172A (en) * | 1995-02-07 | 1996-08-27 | Ethicon, Inc. | Utilization of biocompatible adhesive/sealant materials for securing surgical devices |
US5464929A (en) * | 1995-03-06 | 1995-11-07 | Ethicon, Inc. | Absorbable polyoxaesters |
US5580923A (en) | 1995-03-14 | 1996-12-03 | Collagen Corporation | Anti-adhesion films and compositions for medical use |
US5900245A (en) * | 1996-03-22 | 1999-05-04 | Focal, Inc. | Compliant tissue sealants |
US5612052A (en) * | 1995-04-13 | 1997-03-18 | Poly-Med, Inc. | Hydrogel-forming, self-solvating absorbable polyester copolymers, and methods for use thereof |
US5817303A (en) * | 1995-05-05 | 1998-10-06 | Protein Polymer Technologies, Inc. | Bonding together tissue with adhesive containing polyfunctional crosslinking agent and protein polymer |
EP0957772A2 (en) * | 1995-06-06 | 1999-11-24 | Quantic Biomedical Partners | Wound sealant preparation and application device and method |
US6833408B2 (en) * | 1995-12-18 | 2004-12-21 | Cohesion Technologies, Inc. | Methods for tissue repair using adhesive materials |
US5752974A (en) | 1995-12-18 | 1998-05-19 | Collagen Corporation | Injectable or implantable biomaterials for filling or blocking lumens and voids of the body |
US5681904A (en) | 1996-04-01 | 1997-10-28 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Azido polymers having improved burn rate |
US5763589A (en) * | 1997-01-09 | 1998-06-09 | Incyte Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Human membrane protein |
US5854382A (en) * | 1997-08-18 | 1998-12-29 | Meadox Medicals, Inc. | Bioresorbable compositions for implantable prostheses |
JP2001520979A (en) * | 1997-10-27 | 2001-11-06 | ザ リージェンツ オブ ザ ユニバーシティ オブ カリフォルニア | Methods and pharmaceutical compositions for retinal wound closure |
JP2002531217A (en) | 1998-12-04 | 2002-09-24 | チャンドラシェカー ピー. パサック, | Biocompatible crosslinked polymer |
ATE514729T1 (en) | 1999-02-01 | 2011-07-15 | Eidgenoess Tech Hochschule | BIOMATERIALS ADDED BY NUCLEOPHILIC REACTION ON CONJUGATE UNSATURATED GROUPS |
US6312725B1 (en) * | 1999-04-16 | 2001-11-06 | Cohesion Technologies, Inc. | Rapid gelling biocompatible polymer composition |
US6258124B1 (en) * | 1999-05-10 | 2001-07-10 | C. R. Bard, Inc. | Prosthetic repair fabric |
CN1194024C (en) * | 1999-08-26 | 2005-03-23 | 巴斯福股份公司 | Cosmetic and/or pharmaceutical preparations with polymers containing polysiloxanes and the uses thereof |
EP2093245B1 (en) | 1999-08-27 | 2012-02-22 | AngioDevice International GmbH | Biocompatible polymer device |
EP1083184A3 (en) * | 1999-09-07 | 2002-07-17 | Basf Aktiengesellschaft | Silicon-containing polymers, their preparation and their use |
JP4227265B2 (en) | 1999-10-18 | 2009-02-18 | キヤノン株式会社 | Laser light quantity control device |
US6296607B1 (en) * | 2000-10-20 | 2001-10-02 | Praxis, Llc. | In situ bulking device |
US20030232013A1 (en) * | 2002-02-22 | 2003-12-18 | Gary Sieckman | Therapeutic and diagnostic targeting of cancers cells with tumor homing peptides |
EP1364663A1 (en) * | 2002-05-21 | 2003-11-26 | Commonwealth Scientific And Industrial Research Organisation | Ocular devices with functionalized surface with adhesive properties |
-
2005
- 2005-04-28 NZ NZ550964A patent/NZ550964A/en unknown
- 2005-04-28 WO PCT/US2005/015036 patent/WO2006078282A2/en active Application Filing
- 2005-04-28 KR KR1020107011113A patent/KR101148445B1/en active IP Right Grant
- 2005-04-28 CN CNA200580021739XA patent/CN101080246A/en active Pending
- 2005-04-28 US US11/118,088 patent/US8067031B2/en active Active
- 2005-04-28 CN CN201410276033.9A patent/CN104174071A/en active Pending
- 2005-04-28 WO PCT/US2005/014906 patent/WO2006083260A2/en active Application Filing
- 2005-04-28 BR BRPI0510477-7A patent/BRPI0510477B1/en active IP Right Grant
- 2005-04-28 KR KR1020067025027A patent/KR100974733B1/en active IP Right Grant
-
2011
- 2011-10-24 US US13/279,987 patent/US8460708B2/en active Active
- 2011-10-24 US US13/279,982 patent/US8481073B2/en active Active
-
2015
- 2015-06-01 HK HK15105201.7A patent/HK1204584A1/en unknown
Patent Citations (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20010003126A1 (en) * | 1995-10-05 | 2001-06-07 | Rhee Woonza M. | Method of making crosslinked polymer matrices in tissue treatment applications |
WO2002102864A1 (en) * | 2001-06-15 | 2002-12-27 | Cohesion Technologies, Inc. | Compositions and systems for forming crosslinked biomaterials and associated methods of preparation and use |
WO2003080144A1 (en) * | 2002-03-22 | 2003-10-02 | Kuros Biosurgery Ag | Composition for hard tissue augmentation |
Cited By (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US8101371B2 (en) | 2007-10-18 | 2012-01-24 | Musc Foundation For Research Development | Methods for the diagnosis of genitourinary cancer |
CN110540404A (en) * | 2019-10-17 | 2019-12-06 | 广州润虹医药科技股份有限公司 | calcium phosphate bone cement with hollow through structure, preparation method and application thereof |
CN110540404B (en) * | 2019-10-17 | 2022-06-10 | 广州润虹医药科技股份有限公司 | Calcium phosphate bone cement with hollow through structure, preparation method and application thereof |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
WO2006078282A2 (en) | 2006-07-27 |
US20120039980A1 (en) | 2012-02-16 |
BRPI0510477A (en) | 2008-01-08 |
HK1204584A1 (en) | 2015-11-27 |
BRPI0510477B1 (en) | 2023-01-17 |
KR20070033981A (en) | 2007-03-27 |
US20050281883A1 (en) | 2005-12-22 |
BRPI0510477A8 (en) | 2019-01-02 |
KR100974733B1 (en) | 2010-08-06 |
NZ550964A (en) | 2011-05-27 |
US20120041481A1 (en) | 2012-02-16 |
US8067031B2 (en) | 2011-11-29 |
CN104174071A (en) | 2014-12-03 |
US8460708B2 (en) | 2013-06-11 |
KR101148445B1 (en) | 2012-07-05 |
WO2006078282A3 (en) | 2007-01-18 |
CN101080246A (en) | 2007-11-28 |
WO2006083260A3 (en) | 2009-02-26 |
KR20100061764A (en) | 2010-06-08 |
US8481073B2 (en) | 2013-07-09 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US9353218B2 (en) | Kit for multifunctional compounds forming crosslinked biomaterials | |
US8481073B2 (en) | Compositions and systems for forming crosslinked biomaterials and associated methods of preparation and use | |
US9326934B2 (en) | Drug delivery from rapid gelling polymer composition | |
US20040219214A1 (en) | Tissue reactive compounds and compositions and uses thereof | |
CA2536181A1 (en) | Polymer compositions and methods for their use | |
US20050142162A1 (en) | Soft tissue implants and anti-scarring agents | |
MXPA06012496A (en) | Compositions and systems for forming crosslinked biomaterials and associated methods of preparation and use |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: PA/a/2006/012496 Country of ref document: MX |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 550964 Country of ref document: NZ |
|
WWW | Wipo information: withdrawn in national office |
Ref document number: DE |
|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 1020067025027 Country of ref document: KR Ref document number: 06120218 Country of ref document: CO Ref document number: 4364/CHENP/2006 Country of ref document: IN |
|
WWP | Wipo information: published in national office |
Ref document number: 1020067025027 Country of ref document: KR |
|
122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase | ||
ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: PI0510477 Country of ref document: BR |